Home

ipf8300 Service Manual

1. The pattern is repeated until 2560 nozzles is reached F 2 3 2 3 Chapter 2 2 Print drive timing Each printhead houses 12 trains of nozzles which share the same data transfer clock Hx CLK and data latch pulses Hx LT Even numbered nozzle data Hx x DATA x EV odd numbered nozzle data Hx x DATA x OD and the Heat Enable Hx x HE x signal are generated for each nozzle train and controlled individually Printing is carried out in two ways through reciprocating motion of the carriage An encoder sensor mounted on the carriage generates a 150 dpi pitched linear scale detection signal ENCODER_A and a signal ENCODER_B shifted 120 de grees in phase The direction of carriage motion is detected from the status of the ENCODER_B signal relative to the leading edge of the ENCODER_A signal The printhead is driven using a 2400 dpi timing signal internal signal which is generated by dividing the ENCODER_A signal detected at the 150 dpi timing into 16 equal sections Printing in the forward direction is triggered at the leading edge of the detection signal ENCODER_A Printing in the backward direction is carried out the same way as printing in the forward direction but at the trailing edge of the de
2. J3003 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 3 MAKITORI_VCC_ON OUT Power supply ON signal 4 MAKITORI_VM_ON OUT Power supply 26V 5 MAKITORI_ENB OUT Media take up drive enable signal 6 PHOTO_SENS_OUT IN Media take up paper detection sensor output signal 7 VM_26V OUT Power supply 26V 8 VM_26V OUT Power supply 26V 9 VMGND GND 10 VMGND GND 11 5V OUT Power supply 5V 12 N C N C 13 N C N C 14 6 16 13150 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 IN 3 IN Hole sensor input signal 3 2 IN 3 IN Hole sensor input signal 3 3 IN 1 IN Hole sensor input signal 1 4 IN 2 IN Hole sensor input signal 2 5 IN 1 IN Hole sensor input signal 1 6 IN 2 IN Hole sensor input signal 2 7 VM_GND GND 8 5V OUT Power supply 5V 9 OUTB OUT Motor output signal B 10 OUTB OUT Motor output signal B 11 OUT A OUT Motor output signal A 12 OUT A OUT Motor output signal A 13 OUTC OUT Motor output signal C 14 OUTC OUT Motor output signal C T 6 17 J3201 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function Al TANK_CLK OUT Ink tank clock signal A2 GND GND A3 OUT_TANK_DAT2 IN OUT Ink tank data signal 2 A4 TANK_ 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V A3 OUT TANK DATI IN OUT Ink tank data signal 1 A6 OUT TANK DATO IN OUT Ink tank data signal O AT GND GND A8 OUT INK DETECTO IN Ink detection sensor outp
3. T 7 31 Display Description Unit D SQ 44 60 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches data size m2 Sq f D SQ 36 44 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches data size m2 Sq f D SQ 24 36 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches data size m2 Sq f D SQ 17 24 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches data size m2 Sq f D SQ 17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches data size m2 Sq f D CNT 44 60 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches sheets data size D CNT 36 44 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches sheets data size D CNT 24 36 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches sheets data size D CNT 17 24 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches sheets data size D CNT 17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper less than 17 inches data size sheets 14 MEDIASIZE1 CUT Counters related to cut sheet printing T 7 32 Display Description Unit P SQ 44 60 Cumul
4. Print item Print content Printed value HEAD 1 Date amp time installed last 4 times YY MM DD Installed head Display order Installed date last gt Installed date 2nd to last gt Installed date 3rd to last gt Installed date initial 2 Removal date amp time last 3 times YY MM DD Display order Last gt 2nd to last gt 3rd to last Main unit serial No last 3 times Display order Last gt 2nd to last gt 3rd to last CLN A auto count Unit Times CLN A manual count 6 Cleaning B auto left cap count 7 Cleaning B auto right cap count CLN B manual count 9 Head replacement ink drain count 0 Secondary transport ink drain count 1 Secondary transport ink fill count 2 Ink filling after head replacement count 3 Recovery suction 4 Number of sheets printed Unit Sheets A4 equivalent sheets 5 Error log YY MM DD xxxx last 4 digits 01 Last 02 2nd to last 03 3rd to last 20 20th to last 6 Refill tank usage log per chip A x B x C x D x E x x 7 Firmware version last 3 XX XX YY MM DD Display order Last gt 2nd to last gt 3rd to last Head highest temperature per chip A xxx B xxx C xxx D xxx E xxx F xxx 9 Number of non discharging nozzles per nozzle row AA xxx AB xxx BA xxx BB xxx CA xxx CB chip A row A chip A row B to chip F row A chip F xxx DA xxx DB xxx EA
5. 1 46 1 7 3 3 Precautions against Static Electricity 1 L u u inneren 1 46 1 7 3 4 Precautions for Disassemblv Heassembhy A 1 46 1 7 3 3 Self diagnosticFe ture 2 22 2222 1 46 1 7 3 6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery n nn n 1 46 Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENGE 2 1 Basic Operation Outline td 2 1 21 1 Printer Diagram al oi re e e E ORE EPIO RR HE b AGEREM 2 1 KEN Wille IEN 2 2 ZIRE DIVINO tt al tal di 2 3 Contents 2 2 tU eo PU t us 2 2 1 Operation Sequence at Power on 2 2 2 Operation Sequence at Power off 2 2 3 Print Position Adjustment F NGHON ido 2 7 22 4 EE BEE E EE 2 7 2 2 5 Printhead Overheating Protection Control 2 7 22 6 Pause between Pages cima se Re E A E RATES 2 7 2 27 E Ee le DEE 2 7 22 8 Sleep Mode Le ia add e 2 7 22 9 Hard Disk DA 2 7 2 3 Printer Mechanical SySteli i i rt tr ede d ie Fe tete p e dece trav ve EA ux 2 8 pei E 2 3 1 1 Outline 2 3 2 Ink 2 3 2 1 Ink Passage 2 3 2 2 Ink Tank Unit 2 3 2 3 Carriage Unit 2 9 2 4 Printliead EE 2 3 2 5 Purge Unit 2 3 2 6 Maintenance Cartridge 2 3 2 7 Air FloW 2 3 3 EE 233 gegen e RN 2
6. T 1 9 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level pin Interface Setup TCP IP 12 IPv4 IPv4 Mode Automatic Manual Protocol 7 DHCP On Off BOOTP On Off RARP On Off IPv4 Settings 13 IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX Subnet Mask XXX XXX XXX XXX Default G W XXX XXX XXX XXX DNS Settings 13 DNS Dync update On Off Pri DNS SrvAddr Sec DNS Host Name DNS Domain Name IPv6 IPv6 Support On Off IPv6 StlessAddrs 9 On Off DHCPv6 9 On Off DNS Settings 9 13 DNS Dync update Statefull Addr On Off Stateless Addr On Off Pri DNS SrvAddr Sec DNS SrvAddr DNS Host Name DNS Domain Name NetWare 12 NetWare On Off Frame Type 8 Auto Detect Ethernet 2 Ethernet 802 2 Ethernet 802 3 Ethernet SNAP Print Service 8 BinderyPServer RPrinter NDSPServer NPrinter 1 21 Chapter 1 1 22 T 1 10 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Interface Setup AppleTalk 12 On Ethernet Driver 12 Auto Detect On Off Comm Mode 10 Half Duplex Full Duplex Ethernet Type 10 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T Spanning Tree Not Use Use MAC Addres
7. J102 Pin Number Siganal name IN OUT Function 24 GND GND 25 1 0 7 IN Head L heat enable signal 7 D 26 GND GND 27 H1 D DATA 7 EV IN Even head L data signal 7 D 28 GND GND 29 H1 D DATA 6 EV IN Even head L data signal 6 D 30 GND GND 31 HI D HE 6 IN Head L heat enable signal 6 D 32 GND GND 33 H1 D DATA 6 OD IN Odd head L data signal 6 D 34 GND GND 35 H1 D DATA 7 OD IN Odd head L data signal 7 D 36 GND GND 37 H1 C DATA 5 OD IN Odd head L data signal 5 C 38 GND GND 39 H1 C HE 5 IN Head L heat enable signal 5 C 40 GND GND 41 H1 C DATA 5 EV IN Even head L data signal 5 C 42 GND GND 43 H1 C DATA 4 EV IN Even head L data signal 4 C 44 GND GND 45 H1 B HE 3 IN Head L heat enable signal 3 B 46 GND GND 47 H1 B DATA 3 EV IN Even head L data signal 3 B 48 GND GND 49 GND GND 50 GND GND T 6 39 J103 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 H DASH_LICC2 IN Head analogue switch A D trigger signal 2 GND GND 3 HI DASLK LICC2 IN Head L analogue switch clock signal 4 GND GND 5 HI DATA LICC2 IN Head L analogue switch data signal 6 GND GND 7 H1 DLD_LICC2 IN Head L analogue switch latch signal 8 VH2 GND 9 H1 DSOUT2 OUT Head L temperature output signal 2 10 GND GND 11 H1 DSOUT 1 OUT Head L temperature output signal 1 12 GND GND 13 HI IN Head L clock signal 14 GND GND 15 HI LT IN Head L latch signal 16 GND GND 17 IO ASI
8. T 7 8 Display Description Unit S N Serial number of printer TYPE Type setting on main controller PCB PF8300 are represented by 44 LF TYPE Feed roller type 0 or 1 TMP Ambient temperature centigrade degrees RH Ambient humidity SIZE LF Detected size of loaded media feed direction mm inch 0 is always detected for the roll media SIZE CR Detected size of loaded media carriage scan direction mm inch AFTER Number of days since initial installation Days INST 3 HEAD Displays the following EEPROM information of the printhead T 7 9 Display Description SINR Serial number of printhead R SINL Serial number of printhead L LOTR Lot number of printhead R LOTL Lot number of printhead L 4 INK Displays the numbers of days passed since installation of the following ink tanks T 7 10 Display Description Unit BK Number of days passed since the BK ink tank was installed Day s MBK Number of days passed since the MBK ink tank was installed Day s C Number of days passed since the C ink tank was installed Day s Number of days passed since the M ink tank was installed Day s Y Number of days passed since the Y ink tank was installed Day s PC Number of days passed since the PC ink tank was installed Day s PM Number of days passed since the PM ink tank was installed Day s GY Number of days passed since the GY ink tank was installed Day s PGY Number of days passed since the PGY ink tank was installed Day s R Numb
9. 3 17 3 5 Part number Name Q ty Servico Mode Level x Main menu PARTS xx 1 QL2 2110 WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT 1 Wia 1 1 2 3 2 012 2108 WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT 2 Wia 3 Wia 4 3 QL2 1650 WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT S 1 Wia 5 4 QM3 3069 SUCTION FAN UNIT 1 Wia 6 5 QL2 1663 DUCT 1 6 3 7025 FAN UNIT 2 Mi 1 2 3 7 QM3 1033 INK SUPPLY MOUNT UNIT L 1 Tf there is waste ink perform waste ink 8 QM3 1034 INK SUPPLY MOUNT UNIT R 1 disposal or parts replacement When replacing consumable parts check for leaking waste ink When replacing each consumable part be careful of leaking waste ink especially from the marked area A and avoid tilting the part when removing A F 3 18 1 WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT Chapter 3 3 12 A 2 3 4 5 A F 3 19 WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT L WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT S F 3 20 SUCTION FAN UNIT F 3 21 DUCT A Chapter 3 6 FAN UNIT F 3 22 Chapter 3 3 1 2 Reinstalling the Printer 3 1 2 1 Reinstalling the Printer 1 Installing after transporting by LEVEL 0 or LEVEL 1 If ink drainage was not performed when transporting by LEVEL 0 or 1 remove the belt stopper and attach the power cord and interface cable after moving the printer to the installation location and then check the operation of the printer with test pattern 2 Installing after transporting
10. 7 3 Chapter 7 7 4 T 7 3 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level COUNTER PRINTER LIFE TTL LIFE ROLL LIFE CUTSHEET LIFE A LIFE F POWER ON W INK CUTTER WIPE SLEEP ON CARRIAGE PRINT DRIVE CR COUNT CR DIST PRINT COUNT PURGE CLN A 1 CLN A 2 CLN A 3 CLN A 6 CLN A 7 CLN A 10 CLN A 11 CLN A 15 CLN A 16 CLN A 17 CLN A TTL CLN M 1 CLN M 4 CLN M 5 CLN M 6 CLN M TTL CLEAR CLR INK CONSUME CLR MTC EXC CLR HEAD L EXC CLR HEAD R EXC CLR Wia 1 EXC CLR Wia 3 EXC CLR Wia 4 EXC CLR Wia 5 EXC CLR Wia 6 EXC CLR CR 1 EXC CLR CR 2 EXC CLR CR 3 EXC CLR CR 4 EXC CLR CR 5 EXC CLR PG 1 EXC CLR HMa 1 EXC CLR PL 1 EXC CLR PS 1 EXC CLR Mi 1 EXC CLR MS 1 EXC CLR FACTORY CNT Chapter 7 T 7 4 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level COUNTER EXCHANGE MTC EXC HEAD L EXC HEAD R EXC BOARD EXC M B Wia 1 EXC Wia 3 EXC Wia 4 EXC Wia 5 EXC Wia 6 EXC CR 1 EXC CR 2 EXC CR 3 EXC CR 4 EXC CR 5 EXC PG 1 EXC HMa 1 EXC
11. XXXXXXXX 06 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 08 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 10 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 12 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 14 MM DD HH MM 16 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXX X 18 MM DD XXXXXXXX 20 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXX X 09 x 10 xxx 11 media_sizexxxxxx 12 media namexxxxxx 02 MM DD HH MM XXXX XXXXXXXX 01 x 02 x 03 x 04 x 05 xx 06 x 07 x 08 x 09 x 10 xxx 11 media_sizexxxxxx 12 media namexxxxxx 03 MM DD HH MM XXXX XXXXXXXX 01 x 02 x 03 x 04 x 05 xx 06 x 07 x 08 x 09 x 10 xxx 11 media_sizexxxxxx 12 media_namexxxxx x 04 MM DD HH MM XXXX XXXXXXX X 01 x 02 x 03 x 04 x 05 xx 06 x 07 x 08 x 09 x 10 xxx 11 media_sizexxxxxx 12 media namexxxxx 05 MM DD HH MM XXXX XXXXXXX X 01 x 02 x 03 x 04 x 05 xx 06 x 07 x 08 x 09 x 10 xxx 11 media_sizexxxxxx 12 media namexxxxxx 7 42 F 7 54 Chapter 7 2 5 Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxx PRINT INF Firm xx xx Boot xx xx MIT DBF x xx MIT DB x xx S N xxxxxxxx Date yyyy mm dd INK CHECK C x Mx MBK2 x BK x COUNTER PRINTER LIFE TTL xxxxxx LIFE ROLL xxxxxx LIFE CUTSHEET ooxxx LIFE A xxxxxx B xxxxxx D xxxxxx F2000XX POWER ON xxxxxx SLEEP ON xxxxxx CUTTER xxxxxx WIPE xxxxxx W INK xxxxxx PDL GARO xxxxxx HP GL 2 xxxxxx CARRIAGE PR
12. INK CHECK 000000 000000 TO DISPLAY VO DISPLAY 1 VO DISPLAY 2 VO DISPLAY 3 ADJUST PRINT PATTERN NOZZLE 1 Press the OK button to execute OPTICAL AXIS Press the OK button to execute LF TUNING LF TUNIG 2 HEAD ADJ MANUAL HEAD ADJ EXTENSION Press the OK button to execute DETAIL Press the OK button to execute BASIC Press the OK button to execute ADJ SETTING A A 1 Adjustment value entry A 48 Adjustment value entry F F 1 Adjustment value entry F 2 Adjustment value entry SAVE SETTINGS YES NO RESET SETTINGS YES NO NOZZLE CHECK POS YES NO GAP CALIB YES NO CHANGE LF TYPE 0 1 CR REG EXECUTE YES NO RESET YES NO CR MOTOR COG YES NO Chapter 7 T 7 2 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level FUNCTION CR UNLOCK YES NO CR LOCK YES NO PG CHECK YES NO CR AUTO SCAN YES NO CR SCAN COUNT 1 Press the OK button to set 30 Press the OK button to set CR SCAN SIZE 1 Press the OK button to set 5 Press the OK button to set CR SCAN SPEED 1 Press the OK button to set 5 Press the OK button to set OPT SENS OUTPUT YES OUTPUTO OUTPUTS NO NOZZLE CHECK YES NO NOZZLE INF C B MEMORY CHK DDR YES NO EEP YES NO HEAD CNT CHK YES NO REPLACE L amp R PRINTHEADS YES NO
13. adds 2 25 24 Printer Electrical System career tea e Q w Sq aaa nu he eek 2 26 EE 2 26 24 11 OVERVie Wiss E 2 26 2 4 2 Controller ee sn as ene ent ease PA A 2 28 2 4 2 1 Main controller PCB components sisss s cccsdisisssssessisissanesssssassiscsscasosssiasssnecedetadaveescbacsbavsenesssdbianescscddedaaunansandetddaassescdcadsnsaenssbessasavnezeiadag ARABAR RA AR 2 28 2 43 Carriage Relay iio id a seien il 2 30 24 3 Carriage NO aia 2 30 2 4 4 Head Relay PCB ita hatha a do bei eee eid ede dee tia 2 30 2 4 4 1 Head relay Components nta 2 30 EE 2 31 2 4 5 1 Media take up PCB COmpoOnents ede et eres AANEREN ENEE 2 31 2 4 6 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB ii A AA A A A it 2 31 Contents 2 4 6 1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components 2 4 7 Power Supply 2 4 7 1 Power supply block diagram 2 5 Detection Functions with Sensors 2 5 1 Sensors for covers 2 5 2 Ink passage system 2 9 3 EE 29 4 Paper path system e St aaa ta RE E 2 5 5 Media take up Unit 2 5 6 Others Chapter 2 2 1 Basic Operation Outline 2 1 1 Printer Diagram Shown below is a printer diagram Main controller PCB 10601 1C604 SO DIMM SDRAM IC802 EEPROM Operation panel PCB Maintenance cartridge relay PCB 1C701 1C703 FLASH ROM J3 J1801 Power supply PCB Maintenance cartridge ROM PCB Ink tank 1C803 IC1 RTC ASIC BAT
14. F 1 31 1 35 Chapter 1 2 Remove the front Basket Rod from the left and right Basket Rods Roll up the Basket Cloth and put it at the back of the Bottom Stand Stay F 1 32 Arrange the Basket Cloth and Basket Rod so they do not interfere with the Media Take up Sensor A F 1 34 1 36 Chapter 1 3 Push in the left and right Basket Rods toward the back all the way until they stop F 1 35 Chapter 1 1 7 Safety and Precautions 1 7 1 Safety Precautions 1 7 1 1 Moving Parts Be careful not to get your hair clothes or accessories caught in the moving parts of the printer These include the carriage unit activated by the carriage motor carriage belt ink tube and flexible cable feed motor driven feed roller and pinch roller and purge motor driven purge unit To prevent accidents the upper cover of the printer is locked during printing so that itdoes not open If the upper cover is opened in the online offline mode the carriage motor feed motor and other driving power supplies are turned off F 1 36 T 1 21 1 Carriage belt 7 Purge unit 2 Ink tube 8 Pinch roller 3 Flexible cable 9 Feed roller 4 Carriage unit 10 Feed unit 5 Carriage motor 11 Feed motor 6 Lift unit 12 Media take up unit 1 38 Chapter 1 1 7 1 2 Adhesion of Ink 1 Ink passages Be careful not to touch the ink passages of the printer or to allow ink to stain the workbench hand
15. This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information Symbol Description Ero Indicates an item of a non specific nature possibly classified as Note Caution or Warning Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion fire Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question Provides a description of a service mode Provides a description of the nature of an error indication Introduction The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual 1 Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with refer ence to the timing of operation In the diagrams NW N represents the path of mechanical drive where a signal name accompanies the symbol the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal The expression turn on the power means flipping on the power switch closing the front door and closing the delivery unit door which results in supplying the machine with power 2 In the digital circuits 1 15 use
16. Platen shutter cleaning warning Clean the platen shutter Chapter 8 8 3 Error Table 8 3 1 Errors Codes represent the numbers that are displayed in DISPLAY in service mode Tf the same message is displayed when the printer is turned off then back on take action as recommended in the Action column T 8 2 Display massage Code Condition detected Action PHead needs cleaning Press Online to clear error 03800500 280C Printhead found to have many non discharging nozzles during a non discharging inspection printing paused Clean the printhead Identify the nozzles in a nozzle check pattern Replace the printhead Execute printhead cleaning Tf this message is still displayed replace the printhead 03800500 280C Printhead found to have many non discharging nozzles during a non discharging inspection printing paused Clean the printhead Identify the nozzles in a nozzle check pattern Replace the printhead Paper size not detected Lift the release lever and reload the paper 03010000 200C Unable to detect the leading end of paper Check the leading end of paper Reload the paper Leading edge detection error Lift the release lever and align leading edge with orange line 03010000 200D Unable to detect the trailing end of cut sheet Check the sheet length Check to see if paper has not jammed Paper size not detected Lift the release l
17. 3 b Action to take after replacing the head management sensor Because the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit is varied from one unit to another the printer has its optical axis corrected to adjust the non discharging nozzle detection position prior to shipment When the head management sensor carriage unit has been replaced it should require adjustment Execute service mode under the following conditions SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt NOZZLE CHK POS 4 26 Chapter 4 4 3 13 PCBs Do not replace the main controller PCB and the maintenance cartridge relay PCB ROM board at the same time Both PCBs hold vital information such as settings and a carriage drive time Before either PCB is replaced such information is temporarily saved through internal communication with the other PCB and is automatically written to the new PCB when it is installed For this reason the two PCBs cannot be replaced at the same time To replace both PCBs work in order of a gt b When the main controller PCB and maintenance cartridge relay PCB have been replaced with service parts check that the latest version of firmware is installed in them Tf not upgrade the firmware to the latest version a Replacing the maintenance cartridge relay PCB ROM board 1 Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug 2 Replace the maintenance cartridge relay PCB 3 Reconnect the power plug and turn on the power while pr
18. 3 3 Service Mode Menu Tree 7 29 Chapter 7 T 7 41 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level DISPLAY VO DISPLAY ADJUST FUNCTION REPLACE COUNTER SETTEING Pth RTC PV AUTO JUDGE NETWORK CERTIFICATE CA CERTIFICATE VALIDITY 1 YYYY MM DD E RDS E RDS SWITCH 1 ON OFF UGW ADDRESS 1 http XXX UGW PORT 1 XXXXX COM TEST 1 YES COM LOG 1 HEAD DOT INF INITIALIZE WARNING ERROR JAM ADJUST W INK CARRIAGE PURGE INK USE CNT W INK CHG CNT HEAD CHG CNT HDD BOX PASS PARTS CHG CNT PARTS COUNTER USER SETTEING CA KEY 1 YES NO ERDS DAT 1 YES NO Press P key to move to the next menu of the same layer and press Y key to move to the menu of one layer deeper The menus shown in 1 are the e RDS related menus 3 4 e RDS Related Setting Details 1 e RDS s Operation Mode E RDS SWITCH In service mode referring to the Service Mode Menu Tree go to E RDS SWITCH menu using key and Y key 1 Choose between ON or OFF using the and keys F 7 28 2 Press OK key to determine the operation mode and go back to the previous screen F 7 29 When the operation mode is determined will be displayed OFF When it is set to OFF e RD
19. 7 36 Chapter 7 7 1 5 Viewing PRINT INF a PRINT INF item detail The details of each PRINT INF item displayed when performing SERVICE MODE gt DISPLAY gt PRINTINF are as follows T 7 45 Print item Print content Printed value SYSTEM S N Serial number of printer characters numerals of 8 byte TYPE Type setting on main controller PCB 44 LF TYPE Feed roller type 0 old type roller 1 new type roller TMP Ambient temperature Unit Centigrade degree RH Ambient humidity Unit SIZE LF Detected size of loaded media feed direction mm 0 is always detected for the roll media SIZE CR Detected size of loaded media carriage scan mm direction AFTER INST Number of days since initial installation Unit Day s HEAD S N L Serial number of printhead L characters numerals 8 digits S N R Serial number of printhead R characters numerals 8 digits LOTL Lot number of printhead L characters numerals 8 digits LOTR Lot number of printhead R characters numerals 8 digits INK Y PC C PGY GY BK Number of days passed since the ink tank was installed Unit Days PM M MBK R G B WARNING 01 to 20 Warning history up to 20 events Number Lowest is the most recent Date mm dd Time mm ss Error code Last 4 digits Cumulative number of printed media equivalent of A4 ERROR 01 to 20 Error history up to 20 events Number Lowest is the most recent Date mm dd Time mm s
20. When the printer starts up compare the serial number memorized in the main PCB s EEPROM with that memorized in the MC relay PCB s EEPROM If they do not match or no serial number is memorized in either EEPROM enter the PCB replacement mode b Procedure Select CPU BOARD or MC BOARD using the and keys and then press the OK key to determine it CPUBOARD Select this after replacing the main PCB The data in the MC relay PCB is copied to the main PCB MC BOARD Select this before replacing the MC relay PCB The data in the main controller PCB is copied to the MC relay PCB c Exiting the PCB replacement mode Turning off the Power key of the printer allows you to exit the PCB replacement mode For details on how to replace the PCB see Disassembly Reassembly gt Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly gt PCBs 2 Download mode Use this mode only when updating the firmware without performing initialization a Entering the download mode 1 Turning off the Power key of the printer 2 With the Stop and Navigate keys pressed down turn on the Power key of the printer Keep pressing the above buttons until Initializing appears on the display b Procedure When Download Mode Send Firmware is shown on the display transfer the firmware When downloading of the firmware is completed the printer is turned off automatically 7 47 Chapter 8 ERROR CODE Contents Contents SALOU A A ee d
21. Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY REASSEMBLY Contents 41 S mViee E 4 1 41 1 Service PANS eegene ettet eta tidad See 4 1 A NAO TN 4 2 4 21 Disassembly Reassembly u a bas 4 2 4 3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly A 4 5 4 3 1 Note on locations prohibited from disassembly 4 5 43 2 Moving A 0284122 ua saa IER RN RA ee REM ea are 4 5 4 3 3 Units requiring draining of Ink L fundere II 4 5 4 3 4 External e id da 4 6 kasse GE 4 13 43 6 Carriage Unita ag e nO tea rin ett EE DEMO EA 4 14 4 3 Ink TUS nlt ie e re etr e e Ee o AS dod eus 4 18 4 3 8 Egeder Unit tc e tation hehe tee en ee 4 20 4 3 0 Purge Unit TT 4 21 4 3 10 Ink Tank rk A WEE OE ae HE 4 22 43 11 Linear Encoder ua a gavit eem aged ndm ee MER 4 25 4312 Head Management 5 a a diaria 4 26 43 13 PGBS animal ho e eve e e vut e dad dee prt 4 27 4 3 14 Opening the cap and moving the Wiper unit L nne nnne trennen nnne nnne 4 28 4 3 15 Opening and closing ink supply valves nennen 4 29 43 16 Drainingithe Ink ard eo e CR RR Do te a LO e ti ei a b eni f te aen 4 30 4 4 Applying the Grease iret ret et Ip ata 4 31 44 T Applying the Grease siete tere el B rse Sn E veru Rp Ev an Dr tated ede Ren 4 31 4 5 Adjustment and Setup ltems nanara 4
22. Chapter 8 8 2 Warning Table 8 2 1 Warnings Codes represent the numbers that are displayed in DISPLAY in service mode and that are recorded in PRINTINF Messages that are not accompanied by a code indication are not logged T 8 1 Display massage Code Condition detected Action Ink Level Check 0180104 1000 BK ink tank near empty Renew the ink tanks Ink Level Check 0180101 1001 Y ink tank near empty Renew the ink tanks Ink Level Check 0180102 1002 M ink tank near empty Renew the ink tanks Ink Level Check 0180103 1003 C ink tank near empty Renew the ink tanks Ink Level Check 0180106 1006 MBK ink tank near empty Renew the ink tanks Ink Level Check 0180106 1007 2 ink tank near empty Renew the ink tanks Problem with Printhead 01800500 1010 Number of non discharging nozzles in printhead Clean the printheads Renew the printheads Chk printing results Warning level Identify the head management sensor unit Prepare for maint cart 01841001 281A Maintenance cartridge near full Replace the maintenance cartridge replacement Prepare for parts Parts counter W1 level Check the parts counter in service mode replacement Call for service Parts replacement time has Parts counter W2 level After checking the parts counter in service mode passed replace any part whose counter is nearing the error
23. KL Feed roller N Printhead hee p Roll media Release lever Roll holder Roll media pick up pressure clutch 1 Roll media pick up pressure clutch 2 Feed roller Feed roller HP sensor encoder sensor Feed motor Pick up pressure solenoid F 2 20 2 24 Chapter 2 2 3 3 3 Cutter Unit 2 3 3 3 1 Structure of Cutter Unit Tf the print driver is configured to use a cutter with roll media cutter unit attached to the left side of the carriage cuts roll media automatically Cutter unit won t cut roll media if the print driver is configured otherwise Cutter unit F 2 21 2 25 Chapter 2 2 4 Printer Electrical System 2 4 1 Outline 2 4 1 1 Overview The printer electrical system consists of the main controller PCB and power supply PCB which are mounted on the back side of the printer the carriage relay PCB the head relay PCB and printhead which are mounted in the carriage the operation panel on the right upper cover and other electrical components such as sensors and motors The main controller PCB manages the image data processing and the entire electrical system and controls relay PCBs and driver functions Power supply PCB Main controller PCB Head relay PCB Carriage relay PCB Media take up relay PCB Operation panel PCB Media take up PCB 2 26 Chapter 2 agan nr Serge demme koser er DEAE ane NN De SO d E AA E AE nn
24. Main controller PCB AC inlet gt 1C1501 1C1701 1C1601 1C1603 Power supply control function IC601 10604 SDRAM Linear encoder sensor Head Heat pulse control function Image data control function IC301 1C304 DI sensor reading EEPROM control function Temperature reading Carriage ETA control function relay PCB Multi sensor EEPROM Multi sensor control function Maintenance cartridge relay PCB Media take up PCB Media take up relay PCB 10104 Motor driver 1C2802 102900 C2902103100 Motor driver 2 27 Chapter 2 2 4 2 Main Controller 2 4 2 1 Main controller PCB components 102902 7 1 2900 YI 110802 O7 a ASIC IC1 1C2 The ASIC ICI IC2 with a 32 16 bit internal bus is driven in sync with the 330 66 MHz external clock It supports the following functions Image processing u
25. YYY Y MM F 7 50 Press A key to exit the CA certificate expiration date display screen and go back to the top of VALIDITY menu f the CA certificate is deleted the screen below will appear T Y NSTALLED F 7 51 7 33 Chapter 7 Press A key to exit the CA certificate expiration date display screen and go back to the top of VALIDITY menu 7 Deleting the CA Certificate CA KEY For the secure communication between the device e RDS and the UGW an authentication technology from a certification authority is used A license has been issued from the certification authority For this reason the devices are shipped with the CA Certificate Authority certificate enabled in advance to prove the license obtained The device e RDS uses this CA certificate to communicate with the UGW thus CA must not be deleted Therefore usually the setup is not necessary If you delete the CA certificate under a special instruction perform the following procedure 1 In service mode referring to the Service Mode Menu Tree go to CA KEY menu using key and Y key CA KEY NO F 7 52 2 Choose between YES NO using Y and keys and press OK key to set CA KEY YES F 7 53 Press OK key and will appear and the initializing process will begin NO Do not delete the CA certificate Default value is NO YES Delete the CA certificate 7 34 Chapter 7 4 FAQ 5 Troubleshoot
26. c Setting numeric value for a menu item Proceed as follows to set a numeric value for an item such as network settings 1 Press the Y key or key to move the underscore to the field you want to enter a numeric value 2 Press the A key or Y key to enter a numeric value 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 and press the OK key when finished Chapter 1 2 Main Menu Paper Menu The structure and settings of the main menu is as follows The asterisk mark is default setting T 1 4 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Load Paper Roll Paper Cut Sheet Eject Paper Chg Paper Type Roll Paper The paper type is displayed here Cut Sheet The paper type is displayed here Chg Paper Size Sheet Size 2 The paper type is displayed here Roll Length 1 Roll Width 2 ManageRemainRoll Off On Paper Details The paper type is displayed Head Height Automatic here Highest High Standard Low Lowest Super Low Skew Check Lv Standard Loose Off Cutting Mode Automatic Eject Manual Cut Speed Fast Standard Slow Trim Edge First Automatic Off On CutDustReduct Off On VacuumStrngth Automatic Strongest Strong Standard Weak Weakest Chapter 1 T 1 5 First Level Second Level Thir
27. 10 Open the upper cover and raise the ejection guide Chapter 3 11 Remove the ejection support and lower the ejection guide F 3 15 12 Install the belt stopper A When mounting the belt stopper be careful not to move the carriage by applying too much pressure If the carriage moves when the heads are capped the rubber part of the cap may touch the nozzles on the heads and damage the print head 13 Close the upper cover 14 Attach the cushioning materials and tape 15 If a basket is installed remove the basket 16 Remove the printer from the stand Hold the transporting handles at left and right bottom of the printer with three persons on each side and separate the printer from the stand 17 Reverse the assembly procedure to disassemble the stand and media take up unit as necessary and pack them 18 Pack the printer and transport A If the printer is subjected to strong vibrations when it is moved it can cause ink leakage or damage to the print head Be sure to move the printer slowly and carefully 3 10 Chapter 3 d Replacing consumable parts during transportation During MOVE PRINTER if a message to replace consumable parts appear check the consumable parts counter from service mode and replace the necessary consumable parts See Service mode The consumable parts to be replaced and counter to be reset depends on the LEVEL 2
28. 12 Remove five screws 6 and lift unit 7 F 4 32 13 Remove the purge unit 14 Remove the cutter unit and lay the caterpillar of the ink tube unit on its side and then remove the carriage from the right side of the printer A To remove the carriage unit pull it out of position keeping the carriage unit level with care not to harm the linear scale Flaws on the linear scale could result in malfunctioning b Mounting the carriage belt 4 16 Chapter 4 To install the carriage belt put in the point of the belt to the interior of the groove 1 and have all the cogs of carriage belt 3 engaged with belt stopper 2 3 c Note on replacing the carriage unit and the multi sensor When either carriage unit or multi sensor has been replaced be sure to replace the multi sensor reference plate QL2 2089 000 MOUNT SENSOR ADJUSTING as well d Action to take after replacing the carriage unit and the multi sensor Because the distance between the multi sensor in the carriage unit and the nozzles in each printhead is varied from one unit to another the printer has its optical axis corrected and paper gap adjustment sensor gain and sensor calibration adjusted prior to shipment When the carriage unit or multi sensor has been replaced they should require adjustment Execute service mode under the following conditions to launch automatic
29. 5 H 2 6mm Unknown 6 Not Used 7 Cut mode setting User cut 2 Eject cut 3 Auto cut Unknown 8 Environment Display Media Information Tool s environment settings A to F according to Temperature Humidity Detection Sensor 0 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F Unknown 9 Borderless printing setting Bordered printing 2 Borderless printing Unknown 10 Not Used 11 Print mode Display print mode Unknown 12 Media width Display media width Unknown 13 Media name Display media name Unknown 8 INK CHECK Displays the history of execution of turning off the remaining ink level detection by using the refilled ink tank in the order of Y PC C PGY GY BK PM M MBK R G and B 0 No execution 1 Executed at least once 7 10 Chapter 7 b VO DISPLAY The information of each sensor and switch is shown in the display Sensor and switch status is shown in the display ON 1 OFF or not used 0 ON 1 OFF or not used 0 Screen 1 170 DISPLAY 1 0000000000000000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 F 7 6 Screen 2 170 DISPLAY 2 0000000000000000 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 F 7 7 Screen 3 I O DISPLAY 3 0000000000000000 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 F 7 8 Upper row Lower row Display position Upper row Lower row Display position Upper row Lower row Display position Chapter 7 Screen 1 Screen 2 and Screen 3 are selectable with the
30. dd et oud tiec ai toot ae re the de as 6 3 1 Firmware Update Tool 6 4 Service Tools 6 4 1 Tool List Chapter 6 6 1 Troubleshooting 6 1 1 Outline 6 1 1 1 Outline of Troubleshooting 1 Outline Troubles subject to troubleshooting are classified into those shown on the display warning error and service call and those not shown on the display The code of warning and error is shown by combining alphanumeric characters of eight digits and four digits The code of service call error is shown by the initial character of E and combining alphanumeric characters of three digits and four digits No code number is displayed when a warning occurs Selecting SERVICE MODE gt DISPLAY gt WARNING allows you to check the warning log 2 Precautions for Troubleshooting 1 Check the environmental conditions and the media used for printing 2 Before performing troubleshooting make sure that all connectors and cables are connected properly 3 When servicing the printer with the external cover removed and the AC power supplied be extremely careful to avoid electric shock and shorting electrical devices 4 In the following sections the troubleshooting steps are described such that the component related to the most probable cause of the problem will be repaired or replaced first being followed by components with less problem probability If multiple components have the same problem probability the steps are described begging with the ea
31. 1 three points x 10 parts F 4 53 4 32 Chapter 4 5 Upper cover stay shaft hole 1 gear shaft 2 shaft end 3 gear tooth face 4 Chapter 4 4 5 Adjustment and Setup Items 4 5 1 Adjustment Item List The following adjustment procedures need to be performed when parts have been replaced or remove and then reinstalled T 4 2 Adjustment item Adjustment timing Multi sensor recalibration Multi sensor replacement removal Carriage unit replacement removal Adjusting feed roller eccentricity Feed roller Feed roller encoder Head management sensor recalibration Head management sensor replacement removal Carriage unit replacement removal Carriage motor recalibration Carriage unit replacement removal Carriage motor replacement removal Carriage belt replacement removal 4 5 2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor a Note on replacing the carriage unit and the multi sensor The multi sensor reference plate QL2 3279 000 MOUNT SENSOR ADJUSTING must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi sensor is being replaced b Multi Sensor Recalibration Because the distance between the multi sensor in the carriage unit and the nozzles in each printhead is varied from one unit to another the printer has its optical axis corrected and paper gap adjustment sensor gain and calibration adjusted prior to shipment When the c
32. 1 3 1 Product Specifications Type Bubble jet large sized paper printer stand model Feeding system Roll media Manual front loading Cut sheet Paper tray front loading Feeding capacity Roll media One roll Outer diameter of roll 150 mm or less Cut sheet 1 sheet Delivery method Forward delivery face up Sheet delivery capability 1 sheet using the outout stacker of the stand Cutter Automatic cross cutter round blade Type of media Plain Paper Plain Paper High Quality Plain Paper High Grade Coated Paper Heavyweight Coated Paper Premium Matte Paper Glossy Photo Paper Semi Glossy Photo Paper Backlit Film Backprint Film Flame Resistant Cloth Fine Art Photo Fine Art Heavyweight Photo Fine Art Textured Canvas Matte Premium Coated Paper Graphic Canvas Durable Backlit Film Durable Banner Matt Coated Paper Extra Matt Coated Paper Opaque Paper Hi Res Graphic Paper Prem Art Paper Embossed Prem Art Paper Smooth Hi Res Barrier Paper Scrim Banner Uni Opaque Backlit Film Roll Up Film Water Res Art Canvas Adhesive Matt Vinyl Stretch Supported thickness 0 07mm to 0 8mm Media size Roll media Width 254mm 10 to 1118mm 44 Length 203mm 8 to 18m 709 Outer diameter of roll 150mm or less The maximum amount of length may vary by the using operating system or the applications Media size Cut sheet Width 203mm 8 to 1118
33. 6 4 1 Tool List 6 30 T 6 47 General purpose tools Application Long phillips scerewdriver Inserting and removing screw Phillips scerewdriver Inserting and removing screw Flat head screwdriver Removing the E ring Needle nose pliers Inserting and removing the spring parts Hex key wrench Inserting and removing hexagonal screws Flat brush Applying grease Lint free paper Wiping off ink Rubber gloves Preventing ink stains T 6 48 Special purpose tools Application Grease MOLYKOTE PG 641 CK 0562 000 Applying to specified locations Grease PERMALUBE G 2 CK 0551 020 Applying to specified locations Cover switch tool QY9 0103 000 Pressing the cover switch Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE Contents Contents Tel e TE 7 1 FAL Service O SS 7 1 FAD Map of the Service Mode nt tddi ted 7 2 1 13 Detailssor Service Mode ec eee ele bebe de a EEN 7 9 7 1 4 e Maintenance imi geW ARE yn re 80222 AR iia 7 26 J RES Viewing CR Kl LEET 7 36 1 2 9 Mode su MUR e eges 7 46 7 2 1 Spec1alModesfor Servieins uu Horton a na ET aa 7 46 Chapter 7 7 1 Service Mode 7 1 1 Service Mode Operation a How to enter the Service mode Enter service mode according to the following procedure 1 Turn off the printer power 2 Turn on the power while pressing the Loa
34. Display massage Code Condition detected Action Roll feed unit error Turn off the printer and check the roll feed unit 03060A00 2E24 Roll cam sensor error Check the roll unit Hardware error 03130031 2F3F Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F3F HP maintenance jet pump motor error Check the purge unit Borderless printng not possible Check supported paper 03861001 2408 Borderless printing disabled unsupported size Check the media size Change the media size Hardware error 03130031 2F3E Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F3E HP maintenance jet pump motor move timeout error Check the purge unit Borderless printng not possible Paper stretched or shrank Confirm usage cond of the paper 03861001 2407 Borderless printing disabled engine detection Reload the paper Hardware error 03130031 2F3D Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F3D HP maintenance jet pump motor overload error Check the purge unit Hardware error 03130031 2F46 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F46 Platen shutter failure Check the platen shutter and shutter HP sensor Error in cutter position 03010000 2E47 Cutter position error Check the cutter unit and surrounding part Rel lever is in wrong position Turn off printer wait then turn on again 030
35. Eject in the main menu when the Output Stacker is in the position for ejection in the front of the printer If you choose Auto matic printed documents may be damaged During ejection in the front of the printer be especially careful when using delicate paper or paper that curls easily With some types of paper the leading edge may curl or bend during ejection In this case straighten out the paper Printed documents may be damaged if the paper is curled or bent Some types of paper may get caught between the Ejection Guide and Output Stacker during ejection In this case free the paper from where it is caught Printed documents may be damaged if the paper gets caught 1 32 Chapter 1 1 Lift the Basket Rod gently to release the lock lower the stacker toward the front and push it all the way back F 1 25 F 1 26 Chapter 1 3 Store the left and right Basket Rods Next remove the Rod Holder Adapter leaving the Rod Holder attached and put it in front of the printer F 1 28 F 1 29 1 34 Chapter 1 6 Form the Basket Cloth into a sloping shape to make it taut and attach the middle Basket Rod to the Rod Holder b Stowing the Output Stacker Stow the Output Stacker if you will use the Media Take up Unit or if you will not use the Output Stacker for an extended period 1 Lift the front Basket Rod gently to release the lock lower the stacker toward the front and push it all the way back
36. F 2 18 2 21 Chapter 2 2 3 2 7 Air Flow 2 3 2 7 1 Air flow Ink mists floating during printing or springing back from the paper are collected in the mist fan unit by air flow in the printer Two mist fans located on the rear side of the printer makes the airflow that carries the ink mists to the mist fan unit F 2 19 2 22 Chapter 2 2 3 3 Paper Path 2 3 3 1 Outline 2 3 3 1 1 Overview of Paper Path The key components of the paper passage consist of a feed roller assembly a pinch roller drive that locks and releases the pinch roller and sensors that detect the feed status of paper It feeds paper in trays conveys and delivers paper Basic operation of the roll media loading sequence 1 Multi sensor light quantity adjustment 2 Paper leading edge detection sensor 3 Paper left edge detection sensor 4 Barcode read Performed only if Chk Remain Roll is turned on 5 Paper skew detection sensor 6 Paper right edge detection sensor 7 Trim edge first detection sensor Performed only if Trim Edge First is turned on 8 Leading edge cutting Leading edge cutting is executed under the following conditions a Trim Edge First is set to Forced b Trim Edge First is set to Automatic and the need for cutting determined c A barcode is detected when Chk Remain Roll is on forced cutting regardless of the setting of Trim Edge First 9 Paper leading edge detection sensor Basic operation of the cut sheet loading
37. Ink Consumed The total amount of ink xxx xxx ml consumed and ink colors are displayed here Print Job Log Pause Print Off On HDD Information Total capacity Box free space Chapter 1 Set Adj Menu T 1 8 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Test Print Nozzle Check Status Print Interface Print Paper Details Print Job Log Menu Map Adjust Printer Head Posi Adj Auto Standard Auto Advanced Auto Expansion 3 Manual 3 Feed Priority Adj Priority 6 Automatic Print Quality Print Length Adj Quality 4 6 Auto GenuinePpr Auto OtherPaper Manual Adjust Length 5 6 AdjustmentPrint A High B Standard Draft Change Settings A High B Standard Draft Calibration Auto Adjust Calibration Log Date Paper Type Use Adj Value Disable Enable Return Defaults Maintenance Head Cleaning Head Cleaning A Head Cleaning B Nozzle Check Replace P head Printhead L Printhead R L R Printheads Repl maint cart Head Info Printhead L Printhead R Repl S Cleaner Change Cutter Interface Setup EOP Timer 12 10 sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 30 min 60 min 1 20 Chapter 1
38. Purge motor Pump encoder Suction pump F 2 17 2 20 Chapter 2 2 3 2 6 Maintenance Cartridge 2 3 2 6 1 Maintenance Cartridge a Maintenance cartridge The maintenance cartridge holds as much about 1200 mL of used inks about 1280 g including the evaporation of moisture from the used inks b Used maintenance cartridge ink detection Used maintenance cartridge ink detection is monitored with regard to a dot count When the quantity of the used ink reaches about 960 mL about 1024 g 80 of the cartridge capacity the warning message Check maint cartridge capacity is displayed to tell that the maintenance cartridge is nearly full Printing may continue even when the warning message is displayed When the quantity of the used ink reaches about 1200 mL about 1280 g 100 of the cartridge capacity a replacement prompt error message is displayed telling that the maintenance cartridge is full When the printer determines that the maintenance cartridge is full it shuts down even while it is printing The printer will remain inoperable until the maintenance cartridge is replaced Memo The maintenance cartridge houses EEPROM so that main controller PCB can control the status of the maintenance cartridge by writing to and reading from the EEPROM content There is no need to initialize the counter information therefore when the maintenance cartridge is replaced Maintenance cartridge relay PCB Maintenance cartridge
39. Use rate until part replacement Counter of the consumable part accumulate 7 24 Chapter 7 g SETTING Make various settings 1 Pth Turn on or off the head pulse rank control function Default OFF 2 RTC Set RTC real time clock after replacing the lithium battery on the main controller PCB T 7 37 Display Description DATE yyyy mm dd Set date TIME hh mm Set time 3 PV AUTO JUDGE Sets ink saver mode Default OFF 4 NETWORK See e maintenance imageWARE Remote for detail 5 E RDS See e maintenance imageW ARE Remote for detail 6 HEAD DOT INF Set whether to turn ON OFF displaying of message as the result of non discharging nozzle detection Default OFF h INITIALIZE T 7 38 Number of non discharging nozzle nozzle 2 560 nozzles ON OFF 0 99 Displays a message to check the printing 100 319 Displays a message to check the head 320 or more Displays a message to replace the head Clear the DISPLAY histories ADJUST settings COUNTER values and other parameters T 7 39 Display Description WARNING Initialize the history of WARNING All displayed contents of DISPLAY gt WARNING will be initialized ERROR Initialize the history of ERROR All displayed contents of DISPLAY gt ERROR will be initialized JAM Initialize the history of J
40. replacement count clearing Times CLR MS 1 EXC Cumulative count of unit MS 1 multi sensor replacement count clearing Times Calibration error index This counter synchronizes with CLR CR 5 EXC CLR FACTORY CNT For factory Times Chapter 7 5 EXCHANGE Counters related to parts replacement 6 DETAIL CNT Other counters 7 INK USEI Counters related to ink consumption 8 INK USE2 Counters related to ink consumption 7 20 T 7 23 Display Description Unit MTC EXC Maintenance cartridge replacement count Times HEAD L EXC Printhead L replacement count Times HEAD R EXC Printhead R replacement count Times BOARD EXC M B Main controller PCB replacement count Times Wia 1 EXC Wia 1 waste ink box unit replacement count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS Wia 1 Wia 3 EXC Wia 3 platen ink box unit replacement count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS Wia 3 Wia 4 EXC Wia 4 platen ink box unit replacement count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS Wia 4 Wia 5 EXC Wia 5 platen ink box unit replacement count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS Wia 5 Wia 6 EXC Wia 6 suction fan unit replacement count Time
41. 1 1 Chapter 1 Upper Cover Ink Tank Cover Ejection Slot Ejection Guide Output Stacker Roll Holder Slot Holder Stopper Roll Holder N G d N Paper Feed Slot Ejection Support Release Lever 1 2 17 16 F 1 2 T 1 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Stand Maintenance Cartridge Cover Maintenance Cartridge Operation Panel Ethernet Port USB Port Accessory Pocket Media Take up Unit Power Inlet Power Supply Connector Carrying Handles Chapter 1 1 2 Features 1 2 1 Features Media pass in widths up to 44 inches 1117 6 mm Large ink tanks save the need for their replacement Uninterrupted printing from subtanks BK and MBK inks are loaded concurrently to eliminate the need for their replacement Media take up unit option is supported Media take up unit option can be mounted concurrently with a basket Durability will be added by maintenance kit High resolutions of 2400 x 1200 dpi maximum coupled with the exceptionally light fast water proof and ozone proof 12 color pigment inks of MBK BK PC C PM M Y R G B GY and PGY deliver high quality photographic picture quality Barcodes printed on roll media make remaining roll media management possible Borderless four side printing support roll media removes laborious cutting work easing the job of creating posters
42. 1 6 4 Basket Unit The Basket Unit output stacker can be installed at four positions as shown 3 F 1 24 1 When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker set it to this position 2 When the Output Stacker is not used set it to this position 3 When printing on large and stiff sheets or when the Media Take up Unit is used or when the Output Stacker is stored for long periods lower it to this position for storage When using the Output Stacker again after storage reattach the Basket Rod on the front of the Output Stacker to the tips of the left and right Basket Rods and pull the side rods out completely 4 When printing banners or when printing on delicate paper set it to this position A When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker always use it in position 1 If you do not printed documents may not be dropped into the Output Stacker and the printed surface may become soiled The Output Stacker can hold one sheet When printing multiple pages remove each sheet after it is printed Before using the Output Stacker remove the Rewind Spool If you do not it may prevent printed documents from being held correctly and it they may be scratched a Using the Output Stacker in the position for ejection in the front of the printer You can also set the Output Stacker to the following position when printing banners or when printing on delicate paper MEMO Always choose Cutting Mode gt
43. 2 GND GND 3 H1 C HE 4_B OUT Head R heat enable signal 4 C 4 GND GND 5 H1 B DATA 3 OD_B OUT Odd head R data signal 1 B 6 GND GND 7 H1 B DATA 2 OD_B OUT Odd head R data signal 2 B 8 GND GND 9 PWLED4_ON OUT Multi sensor LED4 drive signal 10 MLT_SENS_2IN IN Multi sensor signal 2 11 MLT_SENS_1IN IN Multi sensor signal 1 12 H3V_ON OUT Power supply 13 PWLED3_ON OUT Multi sensor LED3 drive signal 14 PWLEDI_ON OUT Multi sensor LED1 drive signal 15 PWLED2_ON OUT Multi sensor LED2 drive signal 16 HI DATA LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch data signal 17 HI DLD LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch latch signal Chapter 6 J102 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 18 HI DASLK LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch clock signal 19 VH DIS OUT VH selection signal 20 GND GND 21 H1 E DATA 9 EV_B OUT Even head R data signal 9 E 22 GND GND 23 H1 E HE 9_B OUT Head R heat enable signal 9 E 24 GND GND 25 HI F DATA 10 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 10 F 26 GND GND 27 HI F DATA 11 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 11 F 28 GND GND 29 HI F HE 11 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 11 F 30 GND GND 31 H1 F DATA 11 OD_B OUT Odd head R data signal 11 F 32 GND GND 33 H1 F HE 10_B OUT Head R heat enable
44. 3V 5 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 6 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 7 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 8 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 9 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 6 1 Chapter 6 J1102 Pin Number Signal name INOUT Function 10 N C N C 11 GND GND 12 PME IN Power management enable signal 13 INTA IN Interrupt signal 14 GND GND 15 RST OUT PCI Reset signal 16 CLK OUT PCI Clock signal 17 GNT OUT Ground signal 18 GND GND 19 REQ IN Request signal 20 AD31 IN OUT Address and data signal 21 AD30 IN OUT Address and data signal 22 AD29 IN OUT Address and data signal 23 AD28 IN OUT Address and data signal 24 GND GND 25 AD27 IN OUT Address and data signal 26 AD26 IN OUT Address and data signal 27 AD25 IN OUT Address and data signal 28 AD24 IN OUT Address and data signal 29 CBE3 IN OUT Bus command and byte enable signal 30 IDSEL OUT Inisharaization device select signal 31 GND GND 32 GND GND 33 AD23 IN OUT Address and data signal 34 AD22 IN OUT Address and data signal 35 AD21 IN OUT Address and data signal 36 AD20 IN OUT Address and data signal 37 GND GND 38 AD19 IN OUT Address and data signal 39 ADIS IN OUT Address and data signal 40 AD17 IN OUT Address an
45. 8 H1 F HE 10_B OUT Head R heat enable signal 10 F 9 GND GND 20 H1 F DATA 11 OD_B OUT Odd head R data signal 11 F 21 GND GND 22 HI F HE 11 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 11 F 23 GND GND 24 HI F DATA 11 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 11 F 25 GND GND 26 HI F DATA 10 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 10 F 27 GND GND 28 H1 E HE 9_B OUT Head R heat enable signal 9 E 29 GND GND 30 H1 E DATA 9 EV_B OUT Even head R data signal 9 E 31 GND GND 32 VH_DIS OUT VH selection signal 33 HI DASLK LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch clock signal 34 HI DLD LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch latch signal 35 HI DATA LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch data signal 36 PWLED2 ON OUT Multi sensor LED2 drive signal 6 9 Chapter 6 6 10 J3601 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 37 PWLEDI_ON OUT Multi sensor LED1 drive signal 38 PWLED3_ON OUT Multi sensor LED3 drive signal 39 H3V_ON OUT Power supply 40 MLT_SENS_1IN IN Multi sensor signal 1 41 MLT_SENS_2IN IN Multi sensor signal 2 42 PWLED4_ON OUT Multi sensor LED4 drive signal 43 GND GND 44 H1 B DATA 2 OD_B OUT Odd head R data signal 2 B 45 GND GND 46 H1 B DATA 3 OD_B OUT Odd head R data signal 1 B 47 GND GND 48 H1 C HE 4_B OUT Head R heat en
46. 8 EV OUT Even head R data signal 8 E 29 GND GND 30 H0 E DATA 9 EV OUT Even head R data signal 9 E 31 GND GND 32 9 OUT Head R heat enable signal 9 E 33 GND GND 34 H0 F DATA 10 EV OUT Even head R data signal 10 F 35 GND GND 36 H0 F DATA 11 EV OUT Even head R data signal 11 F 37 GND GND 38 H0 F HE 11 OUT Head R heat enable signal 11 F 39 GND GND 40 H0 F DATA 11 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 11 F 41 GND GND 42 H0 F DATA 10 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 10 F 43 GND GND 44 H0 F HE 10 OUT Head R heat enable signal 10 F 45 GND GND 46 H0 E DATA 9 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 9 E 47 GND GND 48 H0 E DATA 8 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 8 E 49 GND GND 50 8 OUT Head R heat enable signal 8 E T 6 36 J803 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 GND GND 2 SNS_5V OUT Power supply 5V 3 GND GND 4 PWLED4 OUT Multi sensor LED4 drive signal 5 GND GND 6 PWLED3 OUT Multi sensor LED3 drive signal 7 GND GND 8 PWLED2 OUT Multi sensor LED2 drive signal 9 GND GND 0 PWLEDI OUT Multi sensor LED1 drive signal 1 GND GND 2 HO DASH LICC2 OUT Head analogue switch A D trigger signal 3 GND GND 4 HO DLD LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch latch signal 5 GND GND 6 HO DATA LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch data signal 7 GND GND 8 HO DASLK LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch clock signal 9 GND GND 20 H0 DSOUTI IN Head R temperature output signal 1 21 GND GND 6
47. Call for service value GARO W1221 01341221 1030 GARO image mode Unknown command Verify the transmitted data before reprinting GARO W1222 01341222 1031 image mode Invalid parameter count no Verify the transmitted data before reprinting parameters GARO W1223 01341223 1032 GARO image mode Required parameter missing Verify the transmitted data before reprinting GARO W1225 01341225 1034 GARO image mode Other warning Verify the transmitted data before reprinting GARO W1226 01341226 103A GARO image mode Image processing table error Verify the transmitted data before reprinting GARO W1231 01341231 1035 GARO setup Unknown command Verify the transmitted data before reprinting GARO W1232 01341232 1036 GARO setup Invalid parameter count Verify the transmitted data before reprinting GARO W1233 01341233 1037 GARO setup Required parameter missing Verify the transmitted data before reprinting GARO W1234 01341234 1038 GARO setup Data out of bounds Verify the transmitted data before reprinting GARO W1235 01341235 1039 GARO setup Other warning Verify the transmitted data before reprinting End of paper feed Forced feed limit Check the remaining quantity of roll media Cannot feed paper more This type of paper is not 01860006 1015 Non support paper of HP GL 2 Exchange for the compatible paper to HP GL 2 compatible with HP GL22 GL2 W0501 01340501 1040 Memory full HP GL 2 Check if there is the non image area of the pr
48. Coated paper Line drawing 2 0 Plain paper Coated paper Fabric banner 22 Premium matte paper Fine art watercolor block print 2 6 Canvas g Paper leading edge detection function paper width detection function skew detection function The multi sensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage detects the leading edge and width of paper feeding on the platen and skews in it h Automatic printhead position adjustment function The multi sensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage reads an adjustment pattern printed on a form and adjusts the print timing of each printhead automat ically i Remaining roll media detection function The printer prints a bar code on roll media upon delivery The multi sensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage indicates the remaining volume of roll media j Internal unit temperature sensor A thermistor installed on the head relay PCB detects the internal unit temperature near the printhead 2 12 Chapter 2 2 3 2 3 2 Structure of Carriage Unit a Printhead mount The printhead is secured to the carriage by the printhead fixer cover and the printhead fixer lever When the printhead is secured to the carriage the signal contact of the head relay PCB is pressed against that of the printhead to convey print signals Further the ink passage from the ink tanks is connected to the printhead via the ink tubes b Ink port Ink is supplied to the printhead via an ink tu
49. GND 16 GND GND 17 VH4 OUT Power supply 18 VH4 OUT Power supply 19 VH4 OUT Power supply 20 VH4 OUT Power supply 21 VH4 OUT Power supply 22 VH4 OUT Power supply 23 VH4_FB IN VH4 feed back voltage 24 VHT OUT Power supply 25 H3V OUT Power supply T 6 35 J802 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 GND GND 2 H0 B DATA 2 EV OUT Even head R data signal 2 B 3 GND GND 4 H0 B DATA 3 EV OUT Even head R data signal 3 B 5 GND GND 6 H0 B HE 3 OUT Head R heat enable signal 3 B 7 GND GND 8 H0 C DATA 4 EV OUT Even head R data signal 4 C 9 GND GND 10 H0 C DATA 5 EV OUT Even head R data signal 5 C Chapter 6 J802 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 GND GND 2 H0 C HE 5 OUT Head R heat enable signal 5 C 3 GND GND 4 H0 C DATA 5 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 5 C 5 GND GND 6 H0 D DATA 7 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 7 D 7 GND GND 8 H0 D DATA 6 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 6 D 9 GND GND 20 H0 D HE 6 OUT Head R heat enable signal 6 D 21 GND GND 22 H0 D DATA 6 EV OUT Even head R data signal 6 D 23 GND GND 24 H0 D DATA 7 EV OUT Even head R data signal 7 D 25 GND GND 26 H0 D HE 7 OUT Head R heat enable signal 7 D 27 GND GND 28 H0 E DATA
50. HH MM XXXXXXXX 11 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 13 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 15 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 17 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 19 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX ERROR 01 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 03 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 05 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 07 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 09 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 11 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 13 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 15 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 17 MM DD HH MM 19 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX JAM 01 MM DD HH MM XXXX XXXXXXXX 01 x 02 x 03 x 04 x 05 xx 06 x 07 x 08 x K 02 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXX X 04 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 06 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 08 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 10 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 12 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 14 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 16 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 18 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 20 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 02 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 04 MM DD HH MM
51. OUT Head R heat enable signal 7 D 71 GND GND 72 HO CLK OUT Head R clock signal 73 HO LT OUT Head R latch signal 74 H0 B DATA 2 EV OUT Even head R data signal 2 B 75 H0 A DATA 0 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 0 A 76 GND GND 77 GND GND 78 GND GND Chapter 6 6 3 Version Up 6 3 1 Firmware Update Tool Use of the following tools allows you to update the firmware of the main controller incorporated in the printer imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool L Printer Service Tool 1 imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool is the same as that for user Procedure 1 Start imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool 2 Place the printer in the online mode 3 Transfer the firmware data to the printer according to the instructions shown on the display 4 The data shown on the LCD on the operation panel changes and the firmware is updated automatically 5 When firmware update is completed the printer will start again File transfer route USB network 2 L Printer Service Tool Procedure 1 Start L Printer Service Tool 2 Place the printer in the online mode 3 Specify the firmware file jdl and then transfer it 4 The data shown on the LCD on the operation panel changes and the firmware is updated automatically 5 When firmware update is completed the printer will start again File transfer route USB network 6 29 Chapter 6 6 4 Service Tools
52. Paper Size Basis Sht Selection 1 ISO A3 13 X19 Super B Sht Selection 2 ISO B1 28 X40 ANSI F Keep Paper Size Off On Rep P head Print Off On 1 23 Chapter 1 2 3 4 T ur 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 T 1 12 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level System Setup Nozzle Check Frequency Standard 1 page Warning Off On CarriageScanWidth Automatic Fixed Use RemoteUI 12 On Off Reset PaprSetngs 12 Erase HDD Data 12 High Speed Secure High Spd Secure Output Method Print Print Auto Del Save Box XX Print After Recv Off On Common Box Set 12 Print Print Auto Del Take up Reel Use Take up Reel Disable Enable Auto Feed 16 Skip Take up Err 17 Off On Prep MovePrinter Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Admin Menu 12 Change Password 13 Init Admin Pswd 13 Printer Info Paper Info Ink Info Head Info System Info Error Log Other Counter Available only if ManageRemainRoll is On Available only if Width Detection is set to Off Available after Auto Advanced in Head Posi Adj has been used once Available when you have specified Feed Priority gt Adj Priority gt
53. R data signal 9 E 22 GND GND 23 HO0 E DATA 8 EV IN Even head R data signal 8 E 24 GND GND 25 H0 D HE 7 IN Head R heat enable signal 7 D 26 GND GND 27 H0 D DATA 7 EV IN Even head R data signal 7 D 28 GND GND 29 H0 D DATA 6 EV IN Even head R data signal 6 D 30 GND GND 31 H0 D HE 6 IN Head R heat enable signal 6 D 32 GND GND 33 H0 D DATA 6 OD IN Odd head R data signal 6 D 34 GND GND 35 H0 D DATA 7 OD IN Odd head R data signal 7 D 36 GND GND 37 H0 C DATA 5 OD IN Odd head R data signal 5 C 38 GND GND 39 H0 C HE 5 IN Head R heat enable signal 5 C 40 GND GND 41 H0 C DATA 5 EV IN Even head R data signal 5 C 42 GND GND 43 H0 C DATA 4 EV IN Even head R data signal 4 C 44 GND GND 45 H0 B HE 3 IN Head R heat enable signal 3 B 46 GND GND 47 0 3 IN Even head R data signal 3 B 48 GND GND 49 H0 B DATA 2 EV IN Even head R data signal 2 B 50 GND GND T 6 42 J203 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 LIFT_CAM_IN OUT Lift cam sensor output signal 2 GND GND 3 HO_CLK IN Head R clock signal 4 GND GND 5 HO_LT IN Head R latch signal 6 GND GND 7 H0 A HE 1 IN Head R heat enable signal 1 A 8 VH2 GND 9 H0 A DATA 1 EV IN Even head R data signal 1 A 10 GND GND 11 H0 A DATA 0 EV IN Even head R data signal 0 A 12 GND GND 13 0 IN Head R heat enable signal 0 A 14 GND GND 15 H0 A DATA 0 OD IN Odd head R data signal 0 A 16 GND GND 17 H0 A
54. Replace with a fully replenis ed M ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810203 2583 Low on the C ink tank as during cleaning Replace with a fully replenis ed C ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810206 2586 Low on the MBK ink tank as during cleaning Replace with a fully replenis ed MBK ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810206 2587 Low on the MBK2 ink tank as during cleaning Replace with a fully replenis ed MBK ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810212 2584 Low on the PM ink tank as during cleaning Replace with a fully replenis hed PM ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810213 2585 Low on the PC ink tank as during cleaning Replace with a fully replenis hed PC ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810205 2588 Low on the GY ink tank as during cleaning Replace with a fully replenis ed GY ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810215 2589 Low on the PGY ink tank as during cleaning Replace with a fully replenis hed PGY ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810207 258A Low on the R ink tank as during cleaning Replace with a fully replenis ed R ink tank Chapter 8 Display
55. UNIT S QL2 1650 000 1 20000 Wia 5 SUCTION FAN UNIT QM3 3069 000 1 20000 Wia 6 DUCT QL2 1663 000 1 20000 CARRIAGE UNIT QM3 7033 000 1 20000 CR 1 CR 2 CR 3 OK W1 W2 MOUNT SENSOR ADJUSTING QL2 3279 000 1 20000 CR 1 CR 2 CR 3 CR 5 SCALE LINEAR QC3 1877 000 20000 CR 2 TUBE UNIT QM3 7030 000 20000 CR 4 OK W1 E144 4047 MULTI SENSOR UNIT QM3 3138 000 20000 CR 5 OK W1 W2 MS 1 PURGE UNIT QM3 7018 000 20000 PG 1 OK W1 E141 4046 SENSOR UNIT QM3 1056 000 20000 HMa 1 OK W1 W2 MOTOR CARRIAGE QK1 2868 000 20000 PL 1 FEED MOTOR ASS Y QM2 2502 000 20000 PS 1 FAN UNIT QM3 7025 000 2 20000 Mi 1 OK W1 E146 4001 User See Product Overview gt Features gt Consumables A After supplies have been replaced execute INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS xx in service mode to initialize clear the parts counter information 5 1 Chapter 5 5 3 Periodic Maintenance 5 3 1 Periodic Maintenance T 5 3 Level Periodic maintenance User Cleaning of ink mist and other substances about once each month Service personnel None a Printer cleaning To keep up with print quality and prevent troubles clean the printer about once each month 1 Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely wipe away any dirt or paper dust from the Paper Feed Slot 1 power cord plug and so on Dry these parts with a dry cloth 1 F 5 1 2 Open the Top Cover 3 If paper dust has accumulated in the Va
56. Ver PARTS CNT Value of each parts counter Status OK W1 W2 E Number of days after set Unit Days Count Life threshold Usage Unit Cumulative count Chapter 7 Print item Print content Printed value COGFF CONDITION Cogging FF result 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Check required 3 Adjust reruired PARAMO F Parameters 1 REF Motor error 6 digits PHASE Phase 3 digits AMP Amplitude 3 digits RATE Decay rate 3 digits PARAMO B Parameters 2 REF Motor error 6 digits PHASE Phase 3 digits AMP Amplitude 3 digits RATE Decay rate 3 digits LF SCALE LF A LF8 pass adjustment value user T FB LFI pass value SCALE A Scale clean SCALE B Scale fast PV AUTO JUDGE Ink reduction mode ON NORMAL LOW only when ON Number of times OFF is entered 7 41 Chapter 7 b Sample Layout PRINT INF layout is shown below 1 5 Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxx PRINT INF Firm xx xx Boot xx xx MIT DBF x xx MIT DB x xx S N xxxxxxxx Date yyyy mm dd SYSTEM S N xxxxxxxx TYPE 12 LF 1 TMP xx RH xx SIZE LF xxxxx x CR xxxxx x AFTER INST xxxx x HEAD IN S N xxxxxxxx LOT XXXXXXXX Y xxxxxxx MBK xxxxxx MBK2 xxxxxx BK xxxxxx WARNING 01 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 03 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 05 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 07 MM DD HH MM XXXXXXXX 09 MM DD
57. and go back to the Communication Error Information screen 5 Initializing the e RDS setting ERDS DAT Usually the setup is not necessary Use this procedure when you want to reset the e RDS settings to the factory default 1 In service mode referring to the Service Mode Menu Tree go to ERDS DAT menu using key and Y key E RDS DAT NO F 7 47 2 Choose between YES NO using 4 and keys and press OK key to set F 7 48 Press OK key and will appear and the initializing process will begin NO Do not initialize the e RDS setting Default value is NO YES Initialize the e RDS setting 6 Displaying the CA Certificate Information VALIDITY For the secure communication between the device e RDS and the UGW an authentication technology from a certification authority is used A license has been issued from the certification authority For this reason the devices are shipped with the CA Certificate Authority certificate enabled in advance to prove the license obtained Therefore usually the setup is not necessary To confirm that this CA certificate is valid or how long it will be valid you can display the expiration date of the CA certificate information 1 In service mode referring to the Service Mode Menu Tree go to VALIDITY menu using key and Y key CERTIFICATE VALI DI TY F 7 49 2 Press V key and the expiration date of the CA certificate will be displayed
58. and refill ink tank usage After the ink tank cover replace the ink tank Paper jam Manually rewind roll all the way 03010000 2016 Cut sheet feed failure Check or replace a cut sheet 03010000 201A Paper right edge detection error cut sheet pick up Set or replace the media 03010000 201B Paper right edge detection error roll media pick up Set or replace the media 03010000 201C Paper left edge detection error cut sheet pick up Set or replace the media 03010000 201D Paper left edge detection error roll media pick up Set or replace the media The paper is too small 033200D2 2E30 Size clip error Confirm the print data Wrong paper type 03864002 2E42 Paper type mismatch Check the type of paper that can be fed and reload the paper Hardware error 03800500 2F47 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03800500 2F47 Head management sensor failure The APCCHK signal of head management sensor is out of range Check the head management sensor and surrounding parts Replace the head management sensor Replace the main controller PCB Hardware error 03800500 2F40 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03800500 2F40 The non discharge of all colors and chips A B EVEN ODD and nozzles is detected Check the ink tube unit and surrounding parts Check the purge unit and surrounding parts Check the he
59. black MBK black BK photocyan PC cyan C photomagenta PM magenta M yellow Y red R blue B green G gray GY and photogray PGY Each of these inks are pigment ink The tanks are also available in two capacities 330 mL and 700 mL Each tank is furnished with a notch for preventing incorrect installation which will allow the tank to be installed only at the position marked in the right color An ink tank should be replaced when an ink tank replacement prompt message appears or when six months expire after the date of initial unpacking whichever occurs earlier Chapter 1 1 2 4 Cutter unit The cutter unit that mounts on the carriage unit is disposable Replace the cutter unit when it gets dull 1 2 5 Roll holder The roller holder accepts paper tubes having inside diameters of both 2 and 3 inches It is furnished with attachments for 2 and 3 inch diameter paper tubes The roll holder clamps the paper tube of a roll not exceeding 150 mm in outside diameter from the inside 2 inch paper tube attachment 3 inch paper tube attachment 1 3 inch paper tube attachment 2 Chapter 1 1 2 6 Stand It is a stand that puts the printer Equipped with casters so that the printer can be easily moved F 1 10 T 1 2 Stopper 2 Stand 1 1 5 Chapter 1 1 2 7 Media take up unit Media take up unit The media take up unit takes up roll media ranging in width from 17
60. count T 7 35 Display Description Unit XX XX Ink color x 1 000 000 dots Cumulative dot counts of each colors TTL Total cumulative dot counts of each colors x 1 000 000 dots 7 23 Chapter 7 18 PARTS CNT Counter related to consumable parts F 7 17 The displays are selectable with the Y and keys Counter of the consumable part current Life of the consumable part Use rate until part replacement Counter of the consumable part accumulate F 7 18 F 7 19 F 7 20 F 7 21 T 7 36 Display Description Unit COUNTER XX X xx x Unit number of consumable parts For detail refer to Maintenance and Inspection gt Consumable Parts Display the status aa and the days passed since the counter bbbb resetting Status OK Use rate until part replacement of all consumable parts included in each unit are below 90 W1 Use rate until part replacement of either of the consumable parts included in each unit has reached 90 or more W2 Use rate until part replacement of either of the consumable parts included in each unit has reached 100 but no need to stop the printer E Use rate until part replacement of either of the consumable parts included in each unit has reached 100 and the printer needs to be stopped Days Unit number of consumable parts Counter of the consumable part current Life of the consumable part
61. count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS MS 1 T 7 24 Display Description Unit MOVE PRINTER Number of times Prep MovePrinter on Main menu is executed Times N INKCHK XX XX Ink color Times Count of turning off the ink remaining level detection for each color MEDIACONFIG CNT Count of media registered by media editor Times T 7 25 Display Description Unit INK USE1 XX XX Ink color ml Cumulative consumption amount of generic ink INK USEI TTL Total amount of cumulative consumption of generic ink ml N INK USE1 XX XX Ink color ml Cumulative consumption amount of refilled ink N INK USEI TTL Total amount of cumulative consumption of refilled ink ml T 7 26 Display Description Unit INK USE2 XX XX Ink color ml Consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tank INK USE2 TTL Total consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tanks ml N INK USE2 XX XX Ink color ml Consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tank N INK USE2 TTL Total consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tanks ml Chapter 7 9 INK EXC Counters related to ink tank replacement T 7 27 Display Description Unit INK EXC XX XX Ink color ml Cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement INK EXC TTL Total amount of cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement ml N INK EXC XX XX Ink color
62. damage electrical devices To prevent this discharge any static buildup by touching a grounded metal fitting before you start disassembling the printer 1 7 3 4 Precautions for Disassembly Reassembly The precautions for disassembly reassembly are described in Disassembly Reassembly 1 7 3 5 Self diagnostic Feature The printer has a self diagnostic feature to analyze hardware problems The self diagnosis result is shown on the display and indicated by lamps For detailed information see Error Codes 1 7 3 6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery The main controller PCB of this printer is equipped with a lithium battery to back up various data A Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions For CA USA Only Included battery contains Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See http www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate for detail Achtung Die Lithiumbatterie darf nur durch das Originalersatzteil Parts Katalog ersetzt werden ansonsten besteht Brand Explosionsgefahr Lithiumbatterien niemals aufladen demontieren oder durch Verbrennen entsorgen bei der Entsorgung die rtlichen Entsorgungsvorschriften beachten Schadstoffe Sonderm ll 1 46 Chapter 1 1 47 Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Contents Contents 21 Basic Operation Quiles ii 2 1 211 Print r Diagram da 2 1 2 1
63. error NULL A UGW response error when UGW error code Try again after a period of time If the same error persists processing has failed check the UGW status with the UGW administrator A HTTPS communication error 13 Server response error A UGW response error Check an error code hexadecimal returned from the UGW Hexadecimal Displayed when communication with UGW has hen retry after a period of time Error detailed in the UGW 1 been successful but an error of some sort has prevented UGW from responding 4 Device internal error An internal device error An error due to the device Switch the device OFF ON Or replace the device system side software Upgrade 5 Server schedule is invalid During the communication test there has been When the error occurs report the details to the support some kind of error in the schedule values passed department Then after the UGW side has responded retry the from UGW communication test 6 Server response time out UGW response time out If this error occurs when the communication test is being run Due to network congestion etc the response from wait some time and rerun the test UGW does not come within the specified time 7 Server not found There is a mistake in the UGW URL and UGW Check that the value of Service mode gt E RDS RGW ADR is cannot be accessed https a01 8 E RDS switch is set OFF E RDS is disabled Set E RDS SWITCH ON and run COM TEST in service mode 9 Server sched
64. from the media You can confirm the amount of margin the media has with the values read with the multi sensor and the status of the multi sensor by comparing the values with the threshold Press the Y key or P key to navigate among OUTPUT 0 to 5 windows OUTPUT 0 111222333 444555 F 7 10 OUTPUT I 666 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 7 11 OUTPUT 2 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 15 F 7 12 OUTPUT 3 16 16 16 17 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 19 20 20 20 F 7 13 OUTPUT 4 21 21 21 22 22 22 23 23 23 24 24 24 25 25 25 F 7 14 Chapter 7 OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 26 26 26 27 27 27 28 28 28 29 29 29 30 30 30 F 7 15 T 7 15 xm Description 1 LED red media output including outside light 2 LED red outside light output when LED is OFF 3 LED red platen output excluding outside light 4 LED red gain 5 6 LED green media output 7 LED green outside light output including outside light 8 LED green platen output excluding outside light 9 LED green gain 10 11 media output including outside light 12 outside light output when LED is OFF 13 platen output excluding outside light 14 gain 15 16 LED blue media output including outside light 17 LED blue outside light output when LED is OFF 18 LED blue platen output exclud
65. head R data signal 3 B 43 GND GND 44 H0 C HE 4 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 4 C 45 GND GND 46 H0 C DATA 4 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 4 C 47 GND GND 48 H0 A HE 0 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 0 A 49 GND GND 50 VHT MONI IN VHT controll signal T 6 21 J3502 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 GND GND 2 HO E DATA 8 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 8 E 3 OUT ENB OUT Head data enable signal 4 H0 D HE 7 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 7 D 5 GND GND 6 H0 D DATA 7 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 7 D 7 GND GND 8 H0 D DATA 6 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 6 D 9 GND GND 10 H0 D DATA 6 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 6 D 11 GND GND 12 H0 D HE 6 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 6 D 13 GND GND 14 H0 C HE 5 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 5 C 15 GND GND 16 H0 C DATA 5 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 5 C 17 GND GND 18 H0 DSOUT2 OUT Head R temperature output signal 2 19 GND GND 20 H0 DSOUTI OUT Head R temperature output signal 1 21 GND GND 22 HO DLD LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch latch signal 23 H0 DATA LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch data signal 24 H0 DASLK LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch clock signal 25 GND GND Chapter 6 J3502 Pin Number Sig
66. ink out condition is assumed b Ink port Depressing the ink tank fixer lever on the printer would cause would cause a hollow needle to pierce the ink tank port sealed by a rubber plug linking the ink passage of the ink to the printer c Air passage Depressing the ink tank fixer lever on the printer would cause an open hollow needle to pierce the air passage sealed by a rubber plug releasing the internal pressure of the ink tank to keep it constant d Notches for preventing incorrect installation Ink tanks are furnished with a notch for preventing incorrect installation Tf the installation of an ink tank in incorrect position is attempted the notch would interfere with it preventing its installation The ink tank fixer lever won t lower without the ink tank fully inserted to reach the mounting position so the ink cannot be supplied F 2 9 T 2 1 1 Ink tank 2 EEPROM 3 Ink port 4 Air passage 5 Notch for preventing incorrect installation 2 10 Chapter 2 e Subtank The subtank installed under each ink tank complements the work of the ink tank agitating the ink in the tank If the ink tank runs out of the ink while printing the ink stored in the subtank is available allowing the ink tank to be replaced without having to stop printing f Ink supply valves Ink tank supply valves are located halfway between the ink tanks and the
67. ink tank Ink tank error Press OK and replace ink tank 03830202 2542 M ink tank ID error Replace with a valid M ink tank Ink tank error Press OK and replace ink tank 03830203 2543 C ink tank ID error Replace with a valid C ink tank Ink tank error Press OK and replace ink tank 03830206 2546 MBK ink tank ID error Replace with a valid MBK ink tank Ink tank error Press OK and replace ink tank 03830206 2547 MBK2 ink tank ID error Replace with a valid MBK ink tank Ink tank error Press OK and replace ink tank 03830212 2544 PM ink tank ID error Replace with a valid PM ink tank Ink tank error Press OK and replace ink tank 03830213 2545 PC ink tank ID error Replace with a valid PC ink tank Ink tank error Press OK and replace ink tank 03830205 2548 GY ink tank ID error Replace with a valid G Y ink tank Chapter 8 8 10 Display massage Code Condition detected Action Ink tank error Press OK and replace ink tank 03830215 2549 PGY ink tank ID error Replace with a valid PGY ink tank Ink tank error Press OK and replace ink tank 03830207 254A R ink tank ID error Replace with a valid R ink tank Ink tank error Press OK and replace ink tank 03830209 254B B ink tank ID error Replace with a valid B ink tank
68. ink tubes These valves prevent the leakage of inks that might otherwise be caused by the opening of the ink tubes on the side of the ink tanks during their replacement The ink supply valves are caused to open and close by the valve open close mechanism that is activated by driving the valve motors The ink tank unit consists of tank bases each organized into one group of six colors and six color ink tubes The color specific ink supply valves are linked with the valve cams so they will open and close at the same time for all colors S EN IW 225 1 Agitation cam sensor 2 Valve motor 3 Valve open closed detection sensor 4 Agitation cam 5 Ink tube 6 Ink supply valve 7 Link 8 Valve cam 9 Ink discharge tube Chapter 2 2 3 2 3 Carriage Unit 2 3 2 3 1 Functions of Carriage Unit a Printhead mounting function The carriage which fixes the printhead in position mechanically is connected to the contact of the head relay PCB b Control function The carriage carries a carriage relay PCB which relays drive signals from the main controller PCB a head relay PCB which relay printhead drive signals to print head a linear encoder which generates print timing signals and a multi sensor which detects the width of paper and skews in it adjusts is registration and head height The carriage relay PCB is connected to the main controller PCB by a flexible cable c Carriage drive function The carr
69. is left Prepare 01810102 1002 M ink tank near empty Renew the M ink tank to replace the ink Not much ink is left Prepare 01810101 1001 Y ink tank near empty Renew the Y ink tank to replace the ink Not much ink is left Prepare 01810106 1006 MBK ink tank near empty Renew the MBK ink tank to replace the ink Not much ink is left Prepare 01810104 1000 BK ink tank near empty Renew the BK ink tank to replace the ink Not much ink is left Prepare 01810112 1004 PM ink tank near empty Renew the PM ink tank to replace the ink 8 2 Chapter 8 Display massage Code Condition detected Action Not much ink is left Prepare 01810113 1005 PC ink tank near empty Renew the PC ink tank to replace the ink Not much ink is left Prepare 01810105 1008 GY ink tank near empty Renew the GY ink tank to replace the ink Not much ink is left Prepare 01810115 1009 PGY ink tank near empty Renew the PGY ink tank to replace the ink Not much ink is left Prepare 01810107 100A R ink tank near empty Renew the R ink tank to replace the ink Not much ink is left Prepare 01810109 100B B ink tank near empty Renew the B ink tank to replace the ink Not much ink is left Prepare 01810108 100C G ink tank near empty Renew the G ink tank to
70. massage Code Condition detected Action Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810209 258B Low on the B ink tank as during cleaning Replace with a fully re plenished B ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810205 2588 Low on the G ink tank as during cleaning Replace with a fully re plenished G ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810204 2590 Low on the BK ink tank during pre printing checks Replace with a fully re plenished BK ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810201 2591 Low on the Y ink tank during pre printing checks Replace with a fully rey plenished Y ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810202 2592 Low on the M ink tank during pre printing checks Replace with a fully re plenished M ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810203 2593 Low on the C ink tank during pre printing checks Replace with a fully re plenished C ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810206 2596 Low on the MBK ink tank during pre printing checks Replace with a fully re plenished MBK ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810206 2597 Low on the MBK ink tank during pre printing checks Replace with a fully re plenished MBK ink tank Ink ins
71. media printing T 7 30 Display Description Unit P SQ 44 60 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches physical size m2 Sq f P SQ 36 44 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches physical size m2 Sq f P SQ 24 36 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches physical size m2 Sq f P SQ 17 24 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches physical size m2 Sq f P SQ 17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches physical size m2 Sq f P CNT 44 60 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches sheets physical size P CNT 36 44 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches sheets physical size P CNT 24 36 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches sheets physical size P CNT 17 24 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches sheets physical size P CNT 17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper less than 17 inches physical size sheets 7 21 Chapter 7 13 MEDIASIZE2 ROLL Counters related to roll media printing
72. retainer holds paper as it is fed 7 Carriage Shaft The Carriage slides along this shaft 8 Paper Alignment Line Align paper with this line when loading it 9 Cleaning Brush When cleaning inside of the Top Cover use this brush to sweep away paper dust on the Platen 10 Switch Set the switch to the side opposite of the circle mark if the edges of printed images are blurred Set the switch to the circle mark side before borderless printing Chapter 1 1 5 4 Carriage 1 Printhead Fixer Cover Holds the Printhead in place 2 Printhead Equipped with ink nozzles Printheads serve a key role in printing 3 Carriage Cover Protects the Carriage 4 Cutter Unit A round bladed cutter for automatic paper cutting The cutter blade is retracted inside when not cutting 5 Printhead Fixer Lever Locks the Printhead Fixer Cover 6 Shaft Cleaner Prevents the Carriage Shaft from becoming dirty 7 Cutter Unit Detachment Lever Used when replacing the Cutter Unit 1 5 5 Ink Tank Cover Inside lt Left gt lt Right gt F 1 20 1 Ink Tank Cartridges of ink in each color 2 Ink Tank Lock Lever A lever that locks the Ink Tank in place and protects it Lift and press down the lever when replacing an Ink Tank To open it lift the stopper of the lever until it stops and then push it down toward the front To close it push it down until it clicks into place Chapter 1 1 6 Basic Operation 1 6 1 Operation P
73. supply 18 VH2 OUT Power supply 19 VH2 OUT Power supply 20 VH2 OUT Power supply 21 VH2 OUT Power supply 22 VH2_FB IN VH2 feed back voltage 23 VHT OUT Power supply 24 GND GND 25 GND GND T 6 32 J702 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 GND GND 2 GND GND 3 GND GND 4 H1 B DATA 3 EV OUT Even head L data signal 3 B 5 GND GND 6 H1 B HE 3 OUT Head L heat enable signal 3 B 7 GND GND 8 H1 C DATA 4 EV OUT Even head L data signal 4 C 9 GND GND 10 H1 C DATA 5 EV OUT Even head L data signal 5 C 11 GND GND 12 H1 C HE 5 OUT Head L heat enable signal 5 C 13 GND GND 14 H1 C DATA 5 OD OUT Odd head L data signal 5 C 15 GND GND 16 H1 D DATA 7 OD OUT Odd head L data signal 7 D 17 GND GND 18 H1 D DATA 6 OD OUT Odd head L data signal 6 D 6 16 Chapter 6 J702 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 19 GND GND 20 H1 D HE 6 OUT Head L heat enable signal 6 D 21 GND GND 22 H1 D DATA 6 EV OUT Even head L data signal 6 D 23 GND GND 24 H1 D DATA 7 EV OUT Even head L data signal 7 D 25 GND GND 26 H1 D HE 7 OUT Head L heat enable signal 7 D 27 GND GND 28 H1 E DATA 8 EV OUT Even head L data signal 8 E 29 GND GND 30 H1 E DATA 9 EV Even head L data signal 9 E 31 GND
74. the amount of debris given off after cutting It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if you use adhesive paper VacuumStrngth Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen Scan Wait Time Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan in bidirectional printing in consideration of how quickly the ink dries Note that printing will take longer if you specify a wait time Roll DryingTime Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet NearEnd RollMrgn Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge of roll paper to ensure better printing quality at the leading edge Note that if you choose 3mm it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy The printed surface may be scratched and ink may adhere to the leading edge It may also cause the Platen to become soiled NearEnd Sht Mrgn Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better printing quality at the leading edge Note that if you choose 3mm it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy The printed surface may be scratched and ink may adhere to the leading edge Bordless Margin Adjust the margin during borderless printing Choose Automatic to have the printer automatically detect the paper width and configure the margin settings for borderless printing If margins are mistakenly created when Automatic is s
75. the printer slowly and carefully Chapter 3 c 1 LEVEL 2 Transporting by plane or ship Transporting in low temperature environment such as sub zero Item Description Prep MovePrinter on the Main menu Perform LEVEL 2 Allowed tilting angle Lengthwise 30 to 30 degrees Rotation 30 to 30 degrees Ink consumption Approximately 600ml of ink is consumed Ink tank Remove all ink tanks Separation of main unit and stand Separate Maintenance cartridge Install Have one new maintenance cartridge ready Replacement of consumable parts Replacement of consumable parts and resetting of counter may be necessary Service support If consumable parts must be replaced service support is necessary 3 7 Chapter 3 c 2 LEVEL 3 Moving the printer on its end T 3 4 Ttem Description Prep MovePrinter on the Main menu Perform LEVEL 3 Allowed tilting angle Lengthwise 90 to 90 degrees Rotation 30 to 30 degrees Ink consumption Approximately 1800ml of ink is consumed Ink tank Remove all ink tanks Separation of main unit and stand Separate Maintenance cartridge Replace with new maintenance cartridge before performing transporting procedure Three new maintenance cartridges must be provided Two for disposing waste ink and one to be installed during transportation Replacement of consumabl
76. to the top of COM LOG menu Tf the Communication Error Information is not saved the screen below will appear COM LOG NO LOG F 7 41 Press key to exit the communication error information screen and go back to the top of COM LOG menu 3 Press V key to display the Detailed Communication Error Information maximum 128 characters 1st 32nd characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X F 7 42 33rd 64th characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X F 7 43 65th 96th characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X F 7 44 7 32 Chapter 7 97th 128th characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X F 7 45 Use lt and gt keys to move among Screen and Screen Detailed Communication Error Information can be made with maximum 128 characters however even if the information is made up with 1 to 96 characters all Screens are still displayed Press key to exit the Detailed Communication Error Information screen and go back to the Communication Error Information screen If Detailed Communication Error Information does not exist the screen below will appear F 7 46 Press A key to exit the Detailed Communication Error Information screen
77. xxx EB xxx FA xxx row FB xxx 20 EEPROM format Ver HEAD INF 2 Date amp time installed last 4 times YY MM DD Head installed 2nd to Display order Installed date last gt Installed date last 2nd to last gt Installed date 3rd to last gt Installed date initial 2 Removal date amp time last 3 times YY MM DD Display order Last gt 2nd to last gt 3rd to last 3 Main unit serial No last 3 times Display order Last gt 2nd to last gt 3rd to last CLN_A auto count Unit Times CLN_A manual count 6 Cleaning B auto left cap count 7 Cleaning B auto right cap count CLN_B manual count 9 Head replacement ink drain count 0 Secondary transport ink drain count 1 Secondary transport ink fill count 2 Ink filling after head replacement count 3 Recovery suction 4 Number of sheets printed Unit Sheets A4 equivalent sheets 5 105 YY MM DD last 4 digits 01 Last 02 2nd to last 03 3rd to last 20 20th to last Refill tank usage log per chip A x B x C x D x E x F x Firmware version last 3 XX XX YY MM DD Display order Last gt 2nd to last gt 3rd to last Head highest temperature per chip A xxx B xxx C xxx D xxx E xxx F xxx 9 Number of non discharging nozzles per nozzle row AA xxx AB xxx BA xxx BB xxx CA xxx CB chip A row A chip A row B to chip F row A chip F xxx DA xxx DB xxx EA xxx EB xxx FA xxx row B FB xxx 20 EEPROM format
78. xxxx TTL xxxxx M xxxx Y xxxx MBK xxxx MBK2 xxxx BK xxxx TTL xxxxx F 7 55 7 43 Chapter 7 3 5 Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxx PRINT INF Firm xx xx Boot xx xx MIT DBF x xx MIT DB x xx S N xxxxxxxx Date yyyy mm dd NAME 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX NAME XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TTL XXXXXXX X M2 sq f TTL XXXXXXX X M2 XXXXXXX X sq f ROLL XXXXXXX X m2 xxxxxxx x sq f ROLL XXXXXXX X M2 xxxxxxx x sq f CUTSHEET xxxxxxx x m2 sq f CUTSHEET xxxxxxx x m2 Sq f MEDIA 3 MEDIA 4 NAME 20000000000000000000000000000XXX NAME XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TTL XXXXXXX X M2 sq f TTL XXXXXXX X M2 XXXXXXX X sq f ROLL XXXXXXX X m2 XXXXXXX X sq f ROLL XXXXXXX X m2 XXXXXXX X sq f CUTSHEET xxxxxxx x m2 sq f CUTSHEET xxxxxxx x m2 Sq f MEDIA 5 MEDIA 6 NAME 2000000000000000000000000000XXXX NAME XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TTL XXXXXXX X M2 sq f TTL XXXXXXX X M2 XXXXXXX X sq f ROLL XXXXXXX X M2 xxxxxxx x sq f ROLL XXXXXXX X M2 xxxxxxx x sq f CUTSHEET xxxxxxx x m2 sq f CUTSHEET xxxxxxx x m2 sq f MEDIA 7 MEDIA OTHER NAME 20000000000000000000000000000XXX NAME 2000000000000000000000000000000 X TTL M2 SO TTL XXXXXXX X m2 XXXXXXX X sq f ROLL XXXXXXX X m2 xxxxx
79. 001 Waste ink recovery count error Replace the platen duct or mist fan or mist filter or suction fan and then clear the parts counter in the service mode Confirm the parts reached to the exchange value by the service mode or PRINT INF E161 403E Abnormal temperature rise in printhead Replace the printhead E194 404A Non discharging nozzle count error Replace the head management sensor unit and then clear the parts counter in the service mode E196 4040 Checksum error when execute the firmware update Execute firmware update or replace the main controller PCB E196 4041 Flash memory erase error when execute the firmware update Execute firmware update or replace the main controller PCB out of position E196 4042 Flash memory write error when execute Execute firmware update or replace the main controller PCB the firmware update E196 4045 EEPROM read write error controller part Replace the main controller PCB E196 404C Serial number mismatch between main Execute PCB replacement mode or replace the main controller PCB controller PCB and maintenance cartridge ROM PCB E196 404D Machine ID mismatch between main Execute PCB replacement mode or replace the main controller PCB controller PCB and maintenance cartridge ROM PCB E196 404E EEPROM read write error engine part Replace the main controller PCB E198 401C RTC error Replace the lithium battery or repl
80. 1 If there is a message instructing to replace the maintenance cartridge or check the remaining ink replace the maintenance cartridge 2 Remove the paper and roll holder 3 From Set Adj Menu gt Prep MovePrinter select LEVEL 1 4 Press the OK key and perform LEVEL 1 MOVE PRINTER 5 Ifthe consumable parts counter is checked and a message to replace consumable parts appear check the consumable parts counter from service mode and replace the necessary consumable part See d Replacing consumable parts during transportation Repeat LEVEL 1 after replacing consumable parts and resetting the counter 6 When MOVE PRINTER completed message appears turn off the power and remove the power cord and interface cable 7 Open the upper cover and raise the ejection guide 3 5 Chapter 3 8 Remove the ejection support and lower the ejection guide 9 Install the belt stopper A When mounting the belt stopper be careful not to move the carriage by applying too much pressure If the carriage moves when the heads are capped the rubber part of the cap may touch the nozzles on the heads and damage the print head 10 Close the upper cover 11 Attach the cushioning materials and tape 12 Unlock the casters on the stand and move the printer slowly A If the printer is subjected to strong vibrations when it is moved it can cause ink leakage or damage to the print head Be sure to move
81. 12 IN Power supply 4 VH2_FB IN VH2 feed back voltage 5 VH2 IN Power supply 6 VH2 IN Power supply 7 VH2 IN Power supply 8 VH2 IN Power supply 9 VH2 IN Power supply 0 VH2 IN Power supply 1 GND GND 2 GND GND 3 GND GND 4 GND GND 5 GND GND 6 GND GND 7 GND GND 8 VHI IN Power supply 9 VHI IN Power supply 20 VHI IN Power supply 21 VHI IN Power supply 22 VHI IN Power supply 23 VHI IN Power supply 24 VHI_FB IN feed back voltage 25 H3V IN Power supply T 6 38 J102 Pin Number Siganal name INOUT Function 1 H1 E HE 8 IN Head L heat enable signal 8 E 2 GND GND 3 H1 E DATA 8 OD IN Odd head L data signal 8 E 4 GND GND 5 H1 E DATA 9 OD IN Odd head L data signal 9 E 6 GND GND 7 H1 F HE 10 IN Head L heat enable signal 10 F 8 VH2 GND 9 H1 F DATA 10 OD IN Odd head L data signal 10 F 0 GND GND 1 H1 F DATA 11 OD IN Odd head L data signal 11 F 2 GND GND 3 HI F HE 11 IN Head L heat enable signal 11 F 4 GND GND 5 HI F DATA 11 EV IN Even head L data signal 11 F 6 GND GND 7 HI F DATA 10 EV IN Even head L data signal 10 F 8 GND GND 9 HI E HE 9 IN Head L heat enable signal 9 E 20 GND GND 21 HI E DATA 9 EV 0 Even head L data signal 9 E 22 GND GND 23 HI E DATA 8 EV IN Even head L data signal 8 E 6 21 Chapter 6 6 22
82. 19 Chapter 6 6 20 J803 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 22 H0 DSOUT2 IN Head R temperature output signal 2 23 GND GND 24 H0 C DATA 4 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 4 C 25 GND GND 26 H0 C HE 4 OUT Head R heat enable signal 4 C 27 GND GND 28 H0 B DATA 3 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 3 B 29 GND GND 30 H0 B DATA 2 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 2 B 31 GND GND 32 H0 B HE 2 OUT Head R heat enable signal 2 B 33 GND GND 34 H0 A DATA 1 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 1 A 35 GND GND 36 H0 A DATA 0 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 0 A 37 GND GND 38 H0 A HE 0 OUT Head R heat enable signal 0 A 39 GND GND 40 H0 A DATA 0 EV OUT Even head R data signal 0 A 41 GND GND 42 H0 A DATA I EV OUT Even head R data signal 1 A 43 GND GND 44 H0 A HE 1 OUT Head R heat enable signal 1 A 45 GND GND 46 HO LT OUT Head R latch signal 47 GND GND 48 HO CLK OUT Head R clock signal 49 GND GND 50 LIFT CAM IN IN Lift cam sensor output signal Chapter 6 6 2 3 Head relay PCB J502 J602 F 6 3 T 6 37 J101 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 GND GND 2 GND GND 3 VHT
83. 2 Print EE UE 2 2 2 1 3 ET 2 3 2 2 Firmware 2 5 2 2 1 Operation Sequence at EE 2 5 2 2 2 Operation Sequence at POWer off ran ida 2 6 2 2 3 Print Position Adjustment Puniction o ete ito e ape RE cde o fei ree Ta Hot He pen 2 7 2 2 4 Head Managemetnt 450227 2 2 5 Printhead Overheating Protection Control l dios 2 7 2 2 0 Pause between aa SE Se 2 7 2 2 7 White Raster ii 2 7 2 2 8 Sleep Mode 2 2 9 Hard Disk Drive 2 3 Printer Mechanical YM ind DIM A TR ST TR DILO 2 3 2 Ink Passage A 2 32 1 Tink Pass N iria AA AA EA AAA ara 2 3 2 1 1 Overview of Ink Passage 2 3 2 2 MK Tank Unit e rene E RTS 2 3 2 2 Str cture of MK Tank E EE 2 10 DIA ara 2 12 2 3 2 3 1 Functions of Carri ge EE 2 12 2 3 2 3 2 Structure of Carriage Unit 2 13 2 32 Printhe d A A E 2 15 2 3 2 4 E Str ct re of BEE 2 15 2 3 2 5 EE 2 16 2 3 2 51 Functions of Purge BEE 2 16 23252 Str cture of E E 2 19 2 3 2 6 Maintenance E e 2 21 2 3 2 6 1 Maintenance Cartrid nr aaa 2 21 PASTE Nigri ap EE 2 22 23 20 EE 2 22 2 3 3 Paper Path 2 3 3 1 Outline 233 L1 Overviewof Paper Pi aa 2 23 2 3 3 2 Paper RE 2 24 2 3 32 Structure of Feed Roller Unit E r AEE EE EE E At 2 24 2 3 3 3 Cutter Unit 2 25 2 3 3 3 1 Str cturesof Gutter
84. 27 HI_CLK OUT Head L clock signal 28 GND GND 6 13 Chapter 6 6 14 J103 Pin Number Signal name INOUT Function 29 H1 C DATA 5 OD_B OUT Odd head L data signal 5 C 30 GND GND 31 H1 C HE 5_B OUT Head L heat enable signal 5 C 32 GND GND 33 H1 D HE 6_B OUT Head L heat enable signal 6 D 34 GND GND 35 H1 D DATA 6 OD_B OUT Odd head L data signal 6 D 36 GND GND 37 H1 D DATA 6 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 6 D 38 GND GND 39 H1 D DATA 7 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 7 D 40 GND GND 41 H1 D HE 7_B OUT Head L heat enable signal 7 D 42 GND GND 43 H1 E DATA 8 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 8 E 44 GND GND 45 H1 DSOUT2 OUT Head temperature output signal 2 46 HI DSOUTI OUT Head temperature output signal 1 47 GND GND 48 IO ASIC SDA IN OUT Head ROM controll signal data 49 IO ASIC SCL B IN OUT Head ROM controll signal clock 50 GND GND T 6 27 J104 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 VHT_MONI IN VHT controll signal 2 GND GND 3 H0 A HE 0 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 0 A 4 GND GND 5 H0 C DATA 4 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 4 C 6 GND GND 7 H0 C HE 4_B OUT Head R heat enable signal 4 C 8 GND GND 9 H0 B DATA 3 OD_B OUT Odd head R data signal 3 B 10 GN
85. 3 3 2 A A EEE AETATIS 2333 CUTS UI ITE 2 4 Printer Electrical System 2 D elle 24 A RO EE 242 Mam Controller ste ates atto stt tes e o v b di Me I IAM HM E tL e 2 42 1 Main controller PCB components cts a nei 244 3 Garriage Relay PCB vie eta end eh veer a i eed an a Eee lei 2 4 3 1 Carriage relay components U uuu 244 Head Relay POB E Re banet 2 4 4 1 Head relay componente 2 4 5 Motor Driver 2 4 5 1 Media take up PCB components 2 4 6 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB 2 4 6 1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components ZAT Powet S pply 5 iiit rete daa 24 T v Powersupply block diagram a iro itti ere tr ertet E is 2 5 Detection Functions with Sensors iiae A paq yy a RA inneren nnns 2 5 Sensors anni eee AH ede Da in eda e irpo Pe a eee ill 2 5 2 Ink passage system 233 Gartiage SVSIerm Oe a amsa bet da di a B ee amapas ana 254 Paper pain system eee nit RE ESI NM RE et 2 5 5 Media take up Unit D EUR Hine Atena 25 6 e a a a a aea Chapter 3 INSTALLATION 3 1 Transporting the Printer ee dl llei raid 3 1 3 1 1 Transporting the Printer illa 28 3 1 3 Ti Transporting h e Pi RO aida 3 1 3 1 2 Reinstalling the Printer 3 1 2 1 Reinstalling the Printer
86. 31000 2F21 Pinch roller open error Check the pinch roller unit and surrounding part Execute printhead cleaning Tf this message is still displayed replace the printhead Printing stopped 03800500 2827 Printhead found to have many non discharging nozzles during a non discharging inspection printing stopped Clean the printhead Identify the nozzles in a nozzle check pattern Replace the printhead 03810103 2513 Unidentified status of C ink tank refill ink tank Invalidate the ink remaining detection function or detection replace the ink tank 03810102 2512 Unidentified status of M ink tank refill ink tank Invalidate the ink remaining detection function or detection replace the ink tank 03810101 2511 Unidentified status of Y ink tank refill ink tank Invalidate the ink remaining detection function or detection replace the ink tank 03810106 2516 Unidentified status of MBK ink tank refill ink tank Invalidate the ink remaining detection function or detection replace the ink tank 03810106 2517 Unidentified status of MBK2 ink tank refill ink tank Invalidate the ink remaining detection function or detection replace the ink tank 03810104 2510 Unidentified status of BK ink tank refill ink tank Invalidate the ink remaining detection function or detection replace the ink tank 03810112 2514 Unidentified status of PM ink tank refill ink tank Invalidate the in
87. 34 4 31 Adjustment Iter EISE u ua ee ae e cte AT cd rr d Tei cd 4 34 4 5 2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor u 4 34 4 5 3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder AAA 4 34 4 5 4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Gensor essen 4 34 Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE Sl Periodic Replacement Parts i cen bbs 5 1 5 1 1 Periodic Repla ement PariS u uu c ea RR Enke 5 1 52 Gonsumable Pa utei a hna Sevens kah apa det sida 5 1 52 2 e EIER E Le CN 5 1 5 gt Periodic Malntenarices 2 a ii 5 2 5 3 1 Periodic Maintenance orn nn ann ana ae namen nn nn doe e Yea urn atada riin a 5 2 Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING GA TOUBISSMOOUIMG WEE 6 1 GU Outline nee OO UERBO dE a DAS 6 1 6 1 1 1 Outline of Troubleshbooting AAA 6 1 6 2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement 6 1 621 Main controller ent 6 1 6 22 Garriage relay POB en eon oe I IDE UI RR itum S 6 12 6 2 3 Head relay POB cta dn Eat Een aa i 6 21 6 3 Dp ime Eus 6 29 6 231 Firmware Update Tooltip in 6 29 6 4 Service Moe ERN 6 30 64 1 TOOl EISE 2 2 NTE 6 30 Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE TL Service Mage tits 7 1 TALA Servico Mode Operation ies tre ei 7 1 Contents 7 1 2 Map of the Service Mode cade ee ad lea Ais 7 2 1 13 DetailS Of Service Mode siii fido 7 9 7 1 4 e Mainten
88. 75 ADI IN OUT Address and data signal 76 ADO IN OUT Address and data signal 77 GND GND 78 HDD_LED N C 79 5V OUT Power supply 5V 80 5V OUT Power supply 5V 81 5V OUT Power supply 5V 82 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 83 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 84 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 85 GND GND 86 GND GND 87 GND GND 88 GND GND T 6 3 J1201 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 GND GND 2 TXP OUT Transmission Data 3 TXN OUT Transmission Data 4 GND GND 5 RXN IN Receive Data 6 RXP IN Receive Data 7 GND GND T 6 4 J1202 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 DASPN IN Access signal 2 5V IN Power supply 5V 3 GND GND T 6 5 J1801 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 RGV20 5V IN Power supply 5V 2 RGV20 5V IN Power supply 5V 3 RGV20 5V IN Power supply 5V 4 GND GND 5 GND GND 6 GND GND 7 VM IN Power supply 32V 8 VM IN Power supply 32V 9 VMGND GND 10 VMGND GND 11 VM_ENB OUT VM enable signal 12 AFCONT OUT Normal Power saving switch signal T 6 6 J2402 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 INKBENM2_AM OUT Left valve motor drive signal AM 2 INKBENM2_AP OUT Left valve motor drive signal AP 3 SNS3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 4 GND GND 5 INKBEN_OPEN_L IN Left valve open close detection sensor output signal 6 TANK_COVER_L IN Left ink tank cover switch output signal 7 GND GND 8 SNS3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 9 GND GND 10 INKBEN CAM L IN Left ink tank agitation cam sensor outp
89. 801 Lithium battery IC1201 HDD Controller J1201 J1202 Linear encoder USB sensor Ink tank ROM PCB HDD Sensor Pick up pressure solenoid Roll media pick up pressure clutch 1 2 Media take ul NIG BOARD ON OFF sensor J201 Media take up paper detection sensor 10304 TT 2 J101 J402 13501 Made eee J103 J201 103 104 po aloe J202 J203 J105 ASIC J3201 dios lusoost 1J102 Multi J501 J701 J702 J3401 J3501 Lu 7 J703 J801 J3502 J3601 otor driver J802 J803 J3602 Media take up PCB Lift cam J502 Media take up Sensor relay PCB Head relay PCB J2701 Fan i Suction fan Carriage J202 Mist fan L R Carriage relay PCB 102700 J2702 J3910 J2402 J2501 Solenoid Clutch J2502 J2701 lock sol J2702 J3001 Dr ock solenoid J3002 J3201 Sensor Switch J3301 Carriage HP sensor Pump encoder sensor Pump cam sensor Media sensor Head management sensor Feed roller encoder sensor Feed roller HP sensor Valve open closed detection sensor L R Agitation cam sensor L R Temperature humidity sensor Upper cover lock switch L R Pressure release switch Ink tank cover switch L R Ink detection sensor J2402 J2501 J2502 J2801 IC2802 1C2900 y3150 1C2902 1C3100 Motor driver Carriage motor Feed motor Lift motor Purge motor Valve motor L R F 2 1 2 1 Chapter 2 2 1 2 Print Signal Se
90. A D ep mwa N 9 2 LE FULL KO 120 Never peel off tape 1 that fixes the ink tube when detaching the joints of the ink tube on the upper part of the carriage or when removing the joint base from the carriage When replacing the ink tube unit be sure that the tapes 1 are posted to the new ink tube unit b Reassembling ink tube units When the ink tube unit has been replaced turn on the power without mounting the printhead and the ink tanks Then mount the printhead and ink tanks as directed by message guidance Chapter 4 A After detaching the joint of the ink tube unit the joint might become easy to come off by the ink that has adhered to it In that case please wash the joint by alcohol and remove the adhering ink ER F 4 37 Chapter 4 4 3 8 Feeder Unit a Handling the feed roller A The feed roller is a functionally important part Therefore be sure to note the following points when handling the roller Do not hold the roller with one hand or warp its shape Do not touch the roller surface coated surface Do not allow the roller to get scratched or marked Hold the roller at two points location D and one of the locations A B or C as shown in the figure below F 4 38 b Action to take after replacing the feed roller encoder and feed roller This printer as shipped has the feed roller eccentricity that
91. AM All displayed contents of DISPLAY gt JAM will be initialized ADJUST Initialize the value of band adjustment by user and head adjustment The automatically adjusted value will not be initialized W INK Initialize the remaining capacity of the maitenance cartridge Clear COUNTER gt PRINTER gt W INK CARRIAGE Initialize the counter related to carriage unit Clear COUNTER gt CARRIAGE PURGE Initialize the counter related to purge unit Clear COUNTER gt PURGE INK USE CNT Initialize the consumption amount of ink Clear COUNTER gt INK USE2 and count up COUNTER gt CLEAR gt CLR INK CONSUME W INK CHG CNT Initialize the maintenance cartridge replacement frequency Clear COUNTER gt EXCHANGE gt MTC EXC and count up COUNTER gt CLEAR gt CLR MTC EXC HEAD CHG L CNT Initialize the printhead L replacement frequency Clear COUNTER gt EXCHANGE gt HEAD L EXC and count up COUNTER gt CLEAR gt CLR HEAD L EXC HEAD CHG R CNT Initialize the printhead R replacement frequency Clear COUNTER gt EXCHANGE gt HEAD R EXC and count up COUNTER gt CLEAR gt CLR HEAD R EXC HDD BOX PASS ALL FOLDERS Initialize the BOX password of all folders of the hard disk drive to factory default FOLDER xx Initialize the BOX password of FOLDER xx of the hard disk drive to factory default PARTS CHG PARTS xx x xx x Uni
92. Automatic or Print Quality Available when you have specified Feed Priority gt Adj Priority gt Automatic or Print Length 6 Displayed if a sheet is loaded in the printer Not shown if you have set IPv4 Mode to Manual Not shown if you have set NetWare to Off Not displayed if IPv6 Support is Off Not shown if you have set Auto Detect to On Print Anyway is displayed when a job being held is selected Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators and only viewing for other users Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators only Follows the setting in Date Format Displayed only when the Media Take up Unit is attached Available when Use Take up Reel is Enable 1 24 Available if Use Take up Reel is Enable roll paper is loaded and you have not executed Auto Feed for the loaded roll Chapter 1 3 Main menu during printing The structure of the main menu during printing is as follows T 1 13 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Adj Fine Feed Printer Info Paper Info Ink Info Head Info System Info Error Log Other Counter 1 25 Chapter 1 4 Main Menu Settings Main menu items are described in the following tables Paper Menu T 1 14 Setting Item Description Instructions Load Paper Sele
93. C EXC Cumulative count of maintenance cartridge replacement count clearing HEAD L EXC Cumulative count of printhead L replacement count clearing HEADR EXC Cumulative count of printhead R replacement count clearing PARTS Wia 1 EXC Cumulative count of unit Wia 1 waste ink box unit replacement count clearing PARTS Wia 3 EXC Cumulative count of unit Wia 3 platen ink box unit replacement count clearing PARTS Wia 4 EXC Cumulative count of unit Wia 4 platen ink box unit replacement count clearing PARTS Wia 5 EXC Cumulative count of unit Wia 5 platen ink box unit replacement count clearing PARTS Wia 6 EXC Cumulative count of unit Wia 6 suction fan unit replacement count clearing PARTS CR 1 EXC Cumulative count of unit CR 1 carriage unit bushing replacement count clearing PARTS CR 2 EXC Cumulative count of unit CR 2 linear encoder sensor linear scale shaft cleaner replacement count clearing PARTS CR 3 EXC Cumulative count of unit CR 3 carriage height changing cam replacement count clearing PARTS CR 4 EXC Cumulative count of unit CR 4 ink tube unit flexible cable unit replacement count clearing PARTS CR 5 EXC Cumulative count of unit CR 5 multi sensor replacement count clearing 7 39 Chapter 7 7 40
94. C SCL IN OUT Head ROM control signal clock 18 GND GND 19 IO ASIC SDA IN OUT Head ROM control signal data 20 GND GND 21 HI B DATA 2 EV IN Even head L data signal 2 B 22 GND GND 23 HI A HE 1 IN Head L heat enable signal 1 A 24 GND GND 25 H1 A DATA 1 EV IN Even head L data signal 1 A 26 GND GND 27 H1 A DATA 0 EV IN Even head L data signal 0 A 28 GND GND 29 HI A HE 0 IN Head L heat enable signal 0 A 30 GND GND 31 H1 A DATA 0 OD IN Odd head L data signal 0 A 32 GND GND 33 H1 A DATA 1 OD IN Odd head L data signal 1 A 34 GND GND Chapter 6 J103 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 35 H1 B HE 2 IN Head L heat enable signal 2 B 36 GND GND 37 H1 B DATA 2 OD IN Odd head L data signal 2 B 38 GND GND 39 H1 B DATA 3 OD IN Odd head L data signal 3 B 40 GND GND 41 H1 C HE 4 IN Head L heat enable signal 4 C 42 GND GND 43 H1 C DATA 4 0D IN Odd head L data signal 4 C 44 GND GND 45 MLT_SENS_1IN OUT Multi sensor signal 1 46 GND GND 47 MLT_SENS_2IN OUT Multi sensor signal 2 48 GND GND 49 SNS5V IN Power supply 5V 50 GND GND T 6 40 J201 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 H3V IN Power supply 2 VHT34 IN Power supply 3 VH4_FB OUT VH4 feed back vol
95. D GND 11 H0 B DATA 2 OD_B OUT Odd head R data signal 2 B 12 GND GND 13 H0 B HE 2_B OUT Head R heat enable signal 2 B 14 GND GND 15 H0 A DATA 1 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 1 A 16 GND GND 17 H0 A DATA 0 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 0 A 18 GND GND 19 H DASH LICC2 B OUT Head analogue switch A D trigger signal 20 GND GND 21 HO E DATA 9 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 9 E 22 GND GND 23 HO E HE 9 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 9 E 24 GND GND 25 H0 F DATA 10 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 10 F 26 GND GND 27 H0 F DATA 11 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 11 F 28 GND GND 29 H0 F HE 11 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 11 F 30 GND GND 31 H0 F DATA 11 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 11 F 32 GND GND 33 H0 F HE 10 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 10 F 34 GND GND 35 HO0 E DATA 9 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 9 E 36 GND GND 37 H0 F DATA 10 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 10 F 38 GND GND 39 HO0 E DATA 8 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 8 E Chapter 6 J104 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 40 GND GND 41 HO E HE 8 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 8 E 42 GND GND 43 H0 D DATA 7 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 7 D 44 GND GND 45 H1 B HE 2_B O
96. D CNT 36 44 D CNT 24 36 D CNT 17 24 D CNT 17 Chapter 7 T 7 6 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level COUNTER MEDIASIZE1 CUT P SQ 44 60 P SQ 44 60 P SQ 36 44 P SQ 36 44 P SQ 24 36 P SQ 24 36 P SQ 17 24 P SQ 17 24 P SQ 17 P SQ 17 P CNT 44 60 P CNT 36 44 P CNT 24 36 P CNT 17 24 P CNT 17 MEDIASIZE2 CUT D SQ 44 60 D SQ 44 60 D SQ 36 44 D SQ 36 44 D SQ 24 36 D SQ 24 36 D SQ 17 24 D SQ 17 24 D SQ 17 D SQ 17 D CNT 44 60 D CNT 36 44 D CNT 24 36 D CNT 17 24 D CNT 17 HEAD DOT CNT 1 HEAD DOT CNT 2 TTL PARTS CNT COUNTER Wia 1 OK W1 W2 E 1 00 2 00 3 00 4 00 COUNTER CT 1 OK W1 W2 E 1 00 2 00 3 00 4 00 7 7 Chapter 7 T 7 7 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level SETTING Pth ON OFF RTC DATE XXXX XX XX Date entry TIME XX XX Time entry PV AUTO JUDGE ON OFF NETWORK CERTIFICATE CA CERTIFICATE VALIDITY YYYY MM DD E RDS E RDS SWITCH ON OFF UGW ADDRESS http XXX UGW PORT XXXXX COM TEST YES COM LOG COM L
97. DATA 1 OD IN Odd head R data signal 1 A 18 GND GND 19 H0 B HE 2 IN Head R heat enable signal 2 B 20 GND GND 21 H0 B DATA 2 OD IN Odd head R data signal 2 B 22 GND GND 23 H0 B DATA 3 OD IN Odd head R data signal 3 B 24 GND GND 25 H0 C HE 4 IN Head R heat enable signal 4 C 26 GND GND Chapter 6 J203 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 27 H0 C DATA 4 OD IN Odd head R data signal 4 C 28 GND GND 29 H0 DSOUT2 OUT Head R temperature output signal 2 30 GND GND 31 H0 DSOUTI OUT Head R temperature output signal 1 32 GND GND 33 HO DASLK LICC2 IN Head R analogue switch clock signal 34 GND GND 35 HO DATA LICC2 IN Head R analogue switch data signal 36 GND GND 37 HO DLD LICC2 IN Head R analogue switch latch signal 38 GND GND 39 H DASH LICC2 IN Head analogue switch A D trigger signal 40 GND GND 41 PWLEDI ON IN Multi sensor drive signal 42 GND GND 43 PWLED2 ON IN Multi sensor LED2 drive signal 44 GND GND 45 PWLED3_ON IN Multi sensor LED3 drive signal 46 GND GND 47 PWLED4_ON IN Multi sensor LED4 drive signal 48 GND GND 49 SNS_5V IN Power supply 5V 50 GND GND T 6 43 J501 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 EEPROM Vcc 3 3V OUT P
98. DNS Host Specify the DNS host name Name DNS Domain Specify the DNS domain name Name IPv6 IPv6 Support Set whether to support IPv6 connection IPv6 StlessAddrs Set whether to use IPv6 stateless address DHCPv6 Set whether to use DHCPv6 setting DNS Settings DNS Dync update Statefull Addr Stateless Addr Specify whether DNS server registration is updated automatically Pri DNS SrvAddr Sec DNS SrvAddr Specify the DNS server address DNS Host Name Specify the DNS host name DNS Domain Name Specify the DNS domain name NetWare NetWare pecify the NetWare protocol To apply your changes choose Register Setting Frame Type Print Service 9 Specify the frame type to use C hoose the print service AppleTalk pecify whether to use the AppleTalk protocol To apply your changes choose Register S Setting Ethernet Auto Detect Driver 12 Specify the communication method To apply your changes choose Register Setting Choose On for automatic configuration of the LAN communication protocol Choose Off to use settings values of Comm Mode and Ethernet Type Comm Mode Choose the LAN communication method Ethernet Type Choose the LAN transfer rate Spanning Tree Choose whether spanning tree packets are supported over the LAN MAC Address Displays the MAC address Inte
99. GND 32 H1 E HE 9 OUT Head L heat enable signal 9 E 33 GND GND 34 HI F DATA 10 EV OUT Even head L data signal 10 F 35 GND GND 36 HI F DATA 11 EV OUT Even head L data signal 11 F 37 GND GND 38 H1 F HE 11 OUT Head L heat enable signal 11 F 39 GND GND 40 HI F DATA 11 OD OUT Odd head L data signal 11 F 41 GND GND 42 H1 F DATA 10 OD OUT Odd head L data signal 10 F 43 GND GND 44 H1 F HE 10 OUT Head L heat enable signal 10 F 45 GND GND 46 H1 E DATA 9 OD OUT Odd head L data signal 9 E 47 GND GND 48 H1 E DATA 8 OD OUT Odd head L data signal 8 E 49 GND GND 50 H1 E HE 8 OUT Head L heat enable signal 8 E T 6 33 J703 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 GND GND 2 GND OUT Power supply 5V 3 GND GND 4 MLT_SENS_2IN IN Multi sensor signal 2 5 GND GND 6 MLT_SENS_1IN IN Multi sensor signal 1 7 GND GND 8 H1 C DATA 4 0D OUT Odd head L data signal 4 C 9 GND GND 0 H1 C HE 4 OUT Head L heat enable signal 4 C 1 GND GND 2 H1 B DATA 3 OD OUT Odd head L data signal 3 B 3 GND GND 4 H1 B DATA 2 OD OUT Odd head L data signal 2 B 5 GND GND 6 1 2 OUT Head L heat enable signal 2 B 7 GND GND 8 H1 A DATA 1 OD OUT Odd head L data signal 1 A 9 GND GND 20 H1 A DATA 0 OD OUT Odd head L data signal 0 A 21 GND GND 22 H1 A HE 0 OUT Head L heat enable signal 0 A 23 GND GND 24 H1 A DATA 0 EV OUT Even head L data signal 0 A 25 GND GND 26 H1 A DATA 1 EV OUT Even head L data s
100. H Print quality guaranteed environment Temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade Humidity 10 to 80 RH Power supply 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Power consumption Maximum During printing Max 190 W Power consumption In power save sleep mode 100 120 VAC SW or less 220 240 VAC 6W or less During standby 1 W or less Printer unit dimensions WxDxH 1893mm x 975mm x 1144mm with stand and output stacker Weight Approx 141 kg with stand and output stacker 1 4 Detailed Specifications 1 4 1 Interface Specifications a USB standard 1 Interface type USB 2 0 Hi Speed Full speed 12 Mbits sec High speed 480 Mbits sec 2 Data transfer system Control transfer Bulk transfer 3 Signal level Compliant with the USB standard 4 Interface cable Twisted pair shielded cable 5 0 m max Compliant with the USB standard Wire materials AWG No 28 data wire pair AWF American Wire Gauge AWG No 20 to No 28 power distribution wire pair 5 Interface connector Printer side Series B receptacle compliant with USB standard Cable side Series B plug compliant with USB standard b Network standard 1 Interface type Interface compliant with IEEE802 3 2 Data transfer system IEEE802 0 10Base T IEEE802 3u 100Base TX Auto Negotiation IEEE802 3ab 1000Base T Auto Negotiation IEEE802 3x Full Duplex 3 Interface cable Category 5 UTP or FTP cable 100 m or s
101. H0 B DIA2 IN Head R DI sensor signal 2 B 39 H0 C HE 4 OUT Head R heat enable signal 4 C 40 H0 D DATA 7 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 7 D 41 H0 E DATA 8 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 8 E 42 H0 F HE 10 OUT Head R heat enable signal 10 F 43 H0 F DATA 11 EV OUT Even head R data signal 11 F 44 H0 E DATA 8 EV OUT Even head R data signal 8 E 45 H0 D DATA 6 EV OUT Even head R data signal 6 D 46 H0 C DIA2 IN Head R DI sensor signal 2 C 47 H0 C DATA 5 EV OUT Even head R data signal 5 C 48 H0 B DIAI IN Head R DI sensor signal 1 B 49 H0 A HE 0 OUT Head R heat enable signal 0 A 50 H0 B DATA 2 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 2 B 51 H0 B DATA 3 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 3 B 52 H0 C DATA 4 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 4 C 53 GND GND 54 GND GND 55 GND GND 56 H0 F DATA 11 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 11 F 57 HO E DATA 9 EV OUT Even head R data signal 9 E 58 GND GND 59 H0 D DATA 6 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 6 D 60 H0 C HE 5 OUT Head R heat enable signal 5 C 61 H0 B HE 3 OUT Head R heat enable signal 3 B 62 H0 A DIAI IN Head R DI sensor signal 1 A 63 H0 A DATA 1 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 1 A 64 GND GND 6 27 Chapter 6 6 28 J602 Pin Number Signal name INOUT Function 65 GND GND 66 GND GND 67 GND GND 68 H0 F DATA 10 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 10 F 69 HO F DIA1 IN Head R DI sensor signal 1 F 70 H0 D HE 7
102. INT xxxxxx DRIVE xxxxxx CR COUNT xxxxxx CR DIST xxxxxx PRINT COUNT xxxxxx PURGE 1 2 XXXXX 3 xx 6 XXXX 7 xxx 10 11 15 16200000 17 TTL xxxxxx CLN M 1 xxxxx 4 xxx 5 xx 6 xxxxx TTLIXXXXX CLEAR INK CONSUME xxx MTC EXC xxx HEAD EXC xxx PARTS CR1 EXC xx PARTS CR2 EXC xx PARTS CR3 EXC xx PARTS CR4 EXC xx PARTS CR5 EXC xx PARTS SP1 EXC xx PARTS PG1 EXC xx PARTS HMat EXC xx PARTS MT1 EXC xx PARTS PL1 EXC xx PARTS EXC xx PARTS CT1 EXC xx PARTS WEI EXC xx PARTS WF2 EXC xx FACTORY CNT xx EXCHANGE MTC EXC xxx HEAD EXC xxx BOARD EXC M B xx PARTS CR1 EXC xx PARTS CR2 EXC xx PARTS CR3 EXC xx PARTS CR4 EXC xx PARTS CR5 EXC xx PARTS SP1 EXC xx PARTS PG1 EXC xx PARTS HMat EXC xx PARTS MT1 EXC xx PARTS PL1 EXC xx PARTS EXC xx PARTS CT1 EXC xx PARTS WEI EXC xx PARTS WF2 EXC xx DETAIL CNT MOVE PRINTER xxx MEDIACONFIG CNT xxx N INKCHK Mixxxx MBK2 xxxx BK xxxx INK USE1 INK C xxxxx xml Mixxxxx xml Y xxxxx xml MBK xxxxx xml MBK2 xxxxx xml BKoooxx xml TTL xxxxxx xml C xxxxx xml M xxxxx xml Y xxxxx xml MBK xxxxx xml MBK2 xxxxx xml BK xxxxx xml TTL xxxxxx xml INK USE2 INK C xxxxx xml M xxxxx xml Y xxxxx xml MBK xxxxx xml MBK2 xxxxx xml BK xxxxx xml TTL xxxxxx xml C xxxxx xml M xxxxx xml Y xxxxx xml MBK xxxxx xml MBK2 xxxxx xml BK xxxxx xml TTL xxxxxx xml INK EXC INK Mixxxx MBK2 xxxx BK
103. Ink tank error Press OK and replace ink tank 03830208 254C G ink tank ID error Replace with a valid G ink tank No ink tank loaded Press OK and check ink tank 03830104 2520 BK ink tank not installed Install a BK ink tank No ink tank loaded Press OK and check ink tank 03830101 2521 Y ink tank not installed Install a Y ink tank No ink tank loaded Press OK and check ink tank 03830102 2522 M ink tank not installed Install a M ink tank No ink tank loaded Press OK and check ink tank 03830103 2523 C ink tank not installed Install aC ink tank No ink tank loaded Press OK and check ink tank 03830106 2526 MBK ink tank not installed Install aMBK ink tank No ink tank loaded Press OK and check ink tank 03830106 2527 2 ink tank not installed Install aMBK ink tank No ink tank loaded Press OK and check ink tank 03830112 2524 PM ink tank not installed Install a PM ink tank No ink tank loaded Press OK and check ink tank 03830113 2525 PC ink tank not installed Install a PC ink tank No ink tank loaded Press OK and check ink tank 03830105 2528 GY ink tank not installed Install a GY ink tank No ink tank loaded Press OK and check ink tank 03830115 2529 PGY ink tank not installed Install a PGY ink tank No ink tank loaded Press OK and check ink tank 03830107 252A R ink tank not i
104. MM DD 6 YY MM DD 7 YY MM DD 8 YY MM DD 9 YY MM DD 10 YY MM DD 11 YY MM DD 12 YY MM DD 13 YY MM DD 14 YY MM DD 15 YY MM DD 16 YY MM DD 17 YY MM DD 18 YY MM DD 19 YY MM DD xxxxxxxx xxxx 20 YY MM DD 15 A x B x C x D x E x F x 16 XX XX YY MM DD XX XX YY MM DD XX XX YY MM DD 17 A xxx B xxx D xxx E xxx F xxx 18 AA xxx AB xxx BA xxx BB xxx CA xxx CB xxx DA xxx DB xxx EA xxx EB xxx FA xxx FB xxx F 7 57 7 45 Chapter 7 5 5 Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxx PRINT INF Firm xx xx Boot xx xx MIT DBF x xx MIT DB x xx S N xxxxxxxx Date yyyyy mm dd PARTS CNT PARTS CR1 OK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PARTSCR2 0K 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PARTS CR3 OK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PARTS CR4 OK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PARTS CR5 OK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PARTS SP1 OK 0 0 0 0 0 PARTS PG1 OK 0 0 0 0 0 PARTS HMa1 OK 0 0 0 0 0 PARTS MT1 OK 0 0 0 0 0 PARTS PL1 OK 0 0 0 0 0 PARTS 1 OK 0 0 0 0 0 PARTS CT1 OK 0 0 0 0 0 PARTS WF1 OK 0 0 0 0 0 PARTSWF2 OK 0 0 0 0 0 COGFF CONDITION 0 PARAMO F REF xxxxxx XXXXXX xxxxxx PHASE XXX XXX AMP xxx XXX X
105. OG LIST HEAD DOT INF ON OFF INITIALIZE WARNIG Press the OK button to clear ERROR Press the OK button to clear JAM Press the OK button to clear ADJUST Press the OK button to clear W INK Press the OK button to clear CARRIAGE Press the OK button to clear PURGE Press the OK button to clear INK USE CNT Press the OK button to clear W INK CHG CNT Press the OK button to clear HEAD CHG L CNT Press the OK button to clear HEAD CHG R CNT Press the OK button to clear HDD BOX PASS ALL FOLDERS Press the OK button to clear FOLDER 1 Press the OK button to clear FOLDER 29 Press the OK button to clear PARTS CHG CNT PARTS Wia ALL Press the OK button to clear PARTS MS 1 Press the OK button to clear PARTS COUNTER PARTS Wia ALL Press the OK button to clear PARTS MS 1 Press the OK button to clear USER SETTEING YES NO CA KEY YES NO ERDS DAT YES NO Chapter 7 7 1 3 Details of Service Mode This section provides details of the Service mode menu a DISPLAY Displays and prints the printer information 1 PRINF INF Prints adjustment values in the User menu DISPLAY and COUNTER parameters on A4 size or lager paper When a roll media is used the layout is optimized according to the media width 2 SYSTEM Displays the printer information shown below
106. PL 1 EXC PS 1 EXC Mi 1 EXC MS 1 EXC DETAIL CNT MOVE PRINTER N INK CHK PC N INK CHK BK MEDIACONFIG CNT INK USE1 INK USE1 PC INK USEI BK INK USEL TTL N INK USEI PC N INK USEI BK N INK USEL TTL INK USE2 INK USE2 PC INK USE2 BK INK USE2 TTL N INK USE2 PC N INK USE2 BK N INK USE2 TTL INK EXC INK EXC PC INK EXC BK INK EXC TTL N INK EXC PC N INK EXC BK N INK EXC TTL 7 5 Chapter 7 7 6 T 7 5 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level COUNTER MEDIA 1 NAME TTL TTL ROLL ROLL CUTSHEET CUTSHEET MEDIA 7 NAME TTL TTL ROLL ROLL CUTSHEET CUTSHEET MEDIA OTHER NAME TTL TTL ROLL ROLL CUTSHEET CUTSHEET MEDIASIZEI ROLL P SQ 44 60 P SQ 44 60 P SQ 36 44 P SQ 36 44 P SQ 24 36 P SQ 24 36 P SQ 17 24 P SQ 17 24 P SQ 17 P SQ 17 P CNT 44 60 P CNT 36 44 P CNT 24 36 P CNT 17 24 P CNT 17 MEDIASIZE2 ROLL D SQ 44 60 D SQ 44 60 D SQ 36 44 D SQ 36 44 D SQ 24 36 D SQ 24 36 D SQ 17 24 D SQ 17 24 D SQ 17 D SQ 17 D CNT 44 60
107. Reassembly gt Draining the ink 2 Turn off the power and move the carriage to above the platen If the carriage is locked at its home position insert a Phillips screwdriver from the right side into hole 1 in the shaft of the lifting unit in the purge unit and turn it counterclockwise This will lower cap 2 and lock pin 3 allowing the carriage to be moved 1 3 Remove the printheads 4 Release the ink tube from the guide detach four link levers 1 from the printhead fixer lever than remove two joint bases 2 F 4 26 A Cover the joints in the ink tube as with a PVC bag to keep inks from splashing from them F 4 27 Chapter 4 5 Remove two screws 1 and ink tube cover 2 6 Remove four screws 1 and open carriage relay PCB cover 2 7 Disconnect five flexible cables from the carriage relay PCB Never peel off tape 1 that fixes the ink tube when detaching the joints of the ink tube on the upper part of the carriage or when removing the joint base from the carriage Chapter 4 8 Twist off belt fixer knob 1 to loosen the belt and remove spring 2 guide 3 and pulley 4 8 2 S SAS NN ie SESS EN 9 F 4 31 9 Release carriage belt from the pulley of the carriage motor 10 Remove two screws 1 and pulley base 2 11 Remove screw 3 and the connector 4 to release head management sensor unit 5
108. S is not used Default value is OFF ON When it is set to ON e RDS is used 7 30 Chapter 7 2 UGW Address UGW ADDRESS and UGW port UGW PORT Usually the default values set in advance are used for the setting value of UGW ADDRESS and UGW PORT Unless there is a special instruction the default value should not be changed If it should be changed the communication with UGW may have an error If UGW ADDRESS and UGW PORT are changed the new setting will be enabled after power OFF ON Therefore usually the setup is not necessary Tf you change under a special instruction perform the following procedure 1 Setting address for UGW In service mode referring to the Service Mode Menu Tree go to UGW ADDRESS menu using key and Y key E RDS UGW ADDRESS F 7 30 Press Y key to enter the Setup Mode A character indicating the input mode in the upper right corner of the screen and the cursor are displayed Enter UGW address URL ADDRESS 7 31 Display to indicate an input mode A Alphabet capital letter a Alphabet small letter 1 Numerical character The cursor is shown at the first letter Use and Y keys to select characters to enter Press Back key to cancel what you entered and go back to the previous screen Press OK key to determine what you entered and go back to the previous screen 2 Setting up the GW Port Number In service mode referring to the S
109. Service Manual IPF8000 series iPF8300 Canon Mar 2 2010 R2 CONFIDENTIAL Application This manual has been issued by Canon Inc for qualified persons to learn technical theory installation maintenance and repair of products This manual covers all localities where the products are sold For this reason there may be information in this manual that does not apply to your locality Corrections This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual Canon will release technical information as the need arises In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copyright This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved Under the copyright laws this manual may not be copied reproduced or translated into another language in whole or in part without the written consent of Canon Inc COPYRIGHT O 2001 CANON INC Printed in Japan Caution Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information Introduction Symbols Used
110. Size Sht Selection 1 Select which size is to be recognized ISO A3 or 13 x19 Super B when the detected size Basis of the cut sheet is between these sizes Sht Selection 2 Select which size is to be recognized ISO B1 or 28 x40 ANSI F when the detected size of the cut sheet is between these sizes Keep Paper Size Select On to give priority to paper size If the margin set with the printer driver is less than the margin set with the printer menu the margin set with the printer menu has priority and text and images extending beyond the margins are truncated Select Off to give priority to margin settings If the margins set with the printer driver and the margins set with the printer menu are different the larger settings are used for printing Rep P head Print Select On to automatically perform Adjust Detail after replacing the Printhead Nozzle Check Set with Frequency the timing to check for nozzle clogging after printing Select Standard to adjust the checking timing according to the nozzle usage Select 1 page to check after each page Select On for Warning to display a warning when the print head nozzle is clogged while printing Use RemoteUI Select Off to disable access from RemoteUI and enable setting only from the operation panel Reset PaprSetngs Restores settings that you have changed with Media Configuration Tool to the factory default values Chap
111. TA 5 EV OUT Even head L data signal 5 C 48 HI B DIAI IN Head L DI sensor signal 1 B 49 H1 A HE 0 OUT Head L heat enable signal O A 50 H1 B DATA 2 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 2 B 51 H1 B DATA 3 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 3 B 52 H1 C DATA 4 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 4 C 53 GND GND 54 GND GND 55 GND GND 56 HI F DATA 11 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 11 F 57 HI E DATA 9 EV OUT Even head L data signal 9 E 58 GND GND 59 H1 D DATA 6 OD OUT Odd head L data signal 6 D 60 H1 C HE 5 OUT Head L heat enable signal 5 C 61 1 3 OUT Head L heat enable signal 3 B 62 HI A DIAI IN Head L DI sensor signal 1 A 63 H1 A DATA 1 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 1 A 64 GND GND 65 GND GND 66 GND GND 67 GND GND 68 H1 F DATA 10 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 10 F 69 HI F DIAI IN Head L DI sensor signal 1 F 70 H1 D HE 7 OUT Head L heat enable signal 7 D 71 GND GND 72 HI_CLK OUT Head L clock signal 73 HI_LT OUT Head L clock signal 74 H1 B DATA 2 EV OUT Even head L data signal 2 B 75 H1 A DATA 0 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 0 A 76 GND GND 77 GND GND 78 GND GND Chapter 6 T 6 46 J602 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 VH3 OUT Power supply 2 VH3 OUT Po
112. TTINGS Save the registration adjustment values that has been input RESET SETTINGS Initialize the registration adjustment val ues to 0 3 NOZZLE CHECK POS This mode for adjusting the optical axis of the head management sensor For details refer to Disassembly Reassembly gt Adjustment and Setup Items gt Pro cedure after replacing the head management sensor 4 GAP CLIB This mode measures the gap between the printhead and media by multi sensor and corrects the calibration value 5 CHANGE LF TYPE Change the type of the feed roller 0 Old feed roller 1 New feed roller Chapter 7 6 CR REG Executes automatic head adjustment Make this adjustment if the resistration remains partially misregistered after user mode head adjustment EXECUTE Execute automatic head adjustment RESET Reset the resistration adjustment value 0 Applicable media size is A2 17inch or larger Applicable media type is photo glossy paper If an error message appears when performing CR REG check the following Replace the multi sensor if the error reoccurs after checking and performing CR REG again lt CHECK gt 1 Check for non discharging of the printhead and dirty media and replace the printhead and or media if necessary 2 Perform Head Cleaning A 3 Perform Head Posi Adj Auto 7 CR MOTOR COG Adjust the carriage motor rotation Perform in the following cases When removing attac
113. UT Head L heat enable signal 2 B 46 GND GND 47 H1 A DATA 1 OD_OUT OUT Odd head L data signal 1 A 48 GND GND 49 H1 C DATA 4 OD_OUT OUT Odd head L data signal 4 C 50 GND GND T 6 28 J105 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 GND GND 2 VH_CHARGEI OUT VH leakage detection ON OFF signal 1 3 VH_CHARGEO OUT VH leakage detection ON OFF signal 0 4 GND GND 5 H0 A DATA 0 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 0 A 6 GND GND 7 H0 A HE 1 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 1 A 8 GND GND 9 H0 A DATA I EV B OUT Even head R data signal 1 A 0 GND GND 1 H0 B DATA 2 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 2 B 2 GND GND 3 H0 B DATA 3 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 3 B 4 GND GND 9 H0 C DATA 4 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 4 C 6 GND GND 7 H0 B HE 3_B OUT Head R heat enable signal 3 B 8 GND GND 9 LIFT_CAM_IN IN Lift cam sensor output signal 20 GND GND 21 H0 C DATA 5 EV_B OUT Even head R data signal 5 C 22 GND GND 23 HO_LT_B OUT Head R latch signal 24 GND GND 25 HO_CLK_B OUT Head R clock signal 26 GND GND 27 HO DASLK LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch clock signal 28 HO DATA LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch data signal 29 HO DLD LICC2 OUT Head R analogue switch latch signal 30 GND GND 31 H0 DSOUTI OUT Head R temperature output signal 1 32 GND GND 33 H0 DSOUT2 OUT Head R temperature output signal 2 34 GND GND 35 H0 C DATA 5 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 5 C 36 GND GND 37 H0 C HE 5 B OUT Head R he
114. UT Odd head R data signal 7 D 9 GND GND 10 HO E HE 8 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 8 E 11 GND GND 12 8 OUT Odd head R data signal 8 E 13 GND GND 14 H0 F DATA 10 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 10 F 6 7 Chapter 6 6 8 J3501 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 15 GND GND 16 HO0 E DATA 9 OD_B OUT Odd head R data signal 9 E 17 GND GND 18 0 10 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 10 F 19 GND GND 20 H0 F DATA 11 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 11 F 21 GND GND 22 H0 F HE 11 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 11 F 23 GND GND 24 HO0 F DATA 11 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 11 F 25 GND GND 26 HO0 F DATA 10 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 10 F 27 GND GND 28 9 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 9 E 29 GND GND 30 HO E DATA 9 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 9 E 31 GND GND 32 H DASH LICC2 B OUT Head analogue switch A D trigger signal 33 GND GND 34 H0 A DATA 0 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 0 A 35 GND GND 36 H0 A DATA 1 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 1 A 37 GND GND 38 H0 B HE 2 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 2 B 39 GND GND 40 H0 B DATA 2 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 2 B 41 GND GND 42 H0 B DATA 3 OD B OUT Odd
115. Units requiring draining of ink When disassembling the following units of the ink passage drain the filled ink completely to prevent ink leakage For how to drain the ink refer to DISASSEM BLY REASSEMBLY gt Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly gt Draining the ink 1 Carriage unit Refer to DISASSEMBLY REASSEMBLY gt Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly gt Carriage unit 2 Ink tube unit Refer to DISASSEMBLY REASSEMBLY gt Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly gt Ink tube unit 3 Ink tank unit Refer to DISASSEMBLY REASSEMBLY gt Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly gt Ink tank unit Chapter 4 4 3 4 External Covers a Left circle cover L Right circle cover L Removing left circle cover L right circle cover L 1 To remove circle cover L 1 insert flathead screwdriver 2 at the position indicated to remove claw 3 and turn the cover forward to remove 1 2 SE 1 F 4 8 Installing left circle cover L right circle cover L 1 Install circle cover L 1 with its part 2 inserted in arrow mark 3 of the right side cover and turn the cover backward to install b Left circle cover S Right circle cover S Removing the left circle cover S right circle cover S 1 Remove circle cover S 1 by turning it forward to remove the hook 4 6 Chapter 4 Installing left circle cover S right circle cover S 1 Install circle cover S 1 with its par
116. XX xxx RATE xxx XXX XXX XXX PARAMO B REF XXXXXX PHASE XXX AMP xxx XXX XXX xxx RATE xxx XXX XXX XXX LF A ROLL LARGE XXX XXXX MIDDLE XXX XXXX SMALL XXX XXXX SMALLER XXX XXXX CUT LARGE XXX XXXX MIDDLE XXX XXXX SMALL XXX XXXX SMALLER XXX XXXX LF B ROLL LARGE XXX XXXX MIDDLE XXX XXXX SMALL XXX XXXX SMALLER XXX XXXX CUT LARGE XXX XXXX MIDDLE XXX XXXX SMALL XXX XXXX SMALLER XXX XXXX SCALE A ROLL LARGE XXX MIDDLE XXX SMALL XXX SMALLER XXX CUT LARGE XXX MIDDLE XXX SMALL XXX SMALLER XXX SCALE B ROLL LARGE XXX MIDDLE XXX SMALL XXX SMALLER XXX CUT LARGE XXX MIDDLE XXX SMALL XXX SMALLER XXX PV AUTO JUDGE ON NORMAL 0 F 7 58 7 46 Chapter 7 7 2 Special Mode 7 2 1 Special Modes for Servicing This printer supports the following special modes in addition to the service mode PCB replacement mode Download mode 1 PCB replacement mode This mode is used when replacing the main PCB or MC relay PCB By executing this mode Backup data of the settings and counter values stored in the MC relay PCB are moved to the new main PCB The data such as the settings and counter values are copied to the MC relay PCB a Entering the PCB replacement mode Follow the same procedure as that for entering the service mode With the Load key and Navigate key pressed down turn on the Power key
117. XXXXXXXX A XXXXX 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 19 1 14 1 YY MM DD xxxxxxxx xxxx 2 YY MM DD 3 YY MM DD 4 YY MM DD 5 YY MM DD 6 YY MM DD 7 8 YY MM DD 9 YY MM DD 10 YY MM DD xxxxxxxx xxxx 11 YY MM DD 12 YY MM DD 13 YY MM DD 14 YY MM DD 15 YY MM DD 16 YY MM DD 17 YY MM DD 18 YY MM DD 19 YY MM DD 20 YY MM DD 15 A x B x C x D x E x F x 16 XX XX YY MM DD XX XX YY MM DD XX XX YY MM DD 17 A xxx B xxx D xxx E xxx F xxx 18 AA xxx AB xxx BA xxx BB xxx CA xxx CB xxx DA xxx DB xxx EA xxx EB xxx FA xxx FB xxx HEAD INF 2 1 YY MM DD YY MM DD YY MM DD YY MM DD 2 YY MM DD YY MM DD YY MM DD 3 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX A XXXXX 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 3 19 1 14 1 YY MM DD 2 YY MM DD 3 YY MM DD 4 YY MM DD 5 YY
118. Y ink tank removal during printing Attach the BK ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01830115 1419 PGY ink tank removal during printing Attach the BK ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01830107 141A R ink tank removal during printing Attach the BK ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01830109 141B B ink tank removal during printing Attach the BK ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01830108 141C G ink tank removal during printing Attach the BK ink tank Check ink tank Chapter 8 Display massage Code Condition detected Action Unable to detect ink level correctly 03031101 25B7 Invalidate the ink remaining detection function when opening the ink tank cover during printing Renew the ink tank after closing the ink tank cover Paper Mismatch 01061000 1021 Paper type mismatch Check the type of paper that can be fed and reload the paper Borderless printng not possible Check supported paper 01861001 1052 Borderless printing disabled Check the data and then print again Paper position not suitable for borderless printing 01861001 1053 Borderless printing disabled engine detection Reload the paper PaprWidth Mismatch 01063000 1054 Roll media width mismatch Change the roll media Blue platen switch is dirty Please clean the switch 01861005 1050
119. _PWM_ON OUT Suction fan duty control signal B4 GND GND B5 VM 26V OUT Power supply 26V B6 MISTFAN R ALARM IN Mist fan R alarm signal B7 GND GND B8 MISTFAN VM 26V OUT Power supply 26V B9 MISTFAN_L_ALARM IN Mist fan L alarm signal B10 GND GND B11 N C N C T 6 11 J2702 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Fuction 1 VM 26V OUT Power supply 26V 2 DCOVER_SOL_L OUT Upper cover lock solenoid L drive signal 3 VM 26V OUT Power supply 26V 4 DCOVER_SOL_R OUT Upper cover lock solenoid R drive signal 5 N C N C 6 N C N C T 6 12 J2801 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 OUT_LFSP_A OUT Feed motor drive signal A 2 OUT_LFSP_VM OUT Power supply 32V 3 OUT_LFSP_AB OUT Feed motor drive signal AB 4 OUT_LFSP_BB OUT Feed motor drive signal BB 5 OUT_LFSP_VM OUT Power supply 32V 6 OUT_LFSP_B OUT Feed motor drive signal B T 6 13 J3001 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 RGV18 VM_CR IN Upper cover lock switch output signal 2 2 1 3 4 RGV16 VM OUT Power supply 32v T 6 14 J3002 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 TH IN Thermister output signal 2 GND GND 3 Vout IN Temperature humidity sensor output signal 4 5V OUT Power supply 5v T 6 15 J3003 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 MAKITORI_UNIT IN Media take up paper detection sensor 2 MAKITORI_LOCK_SENS IN Media take up on off sensor output signal 6 5 Chapter 6
120. able signal 4 C 49 GND GND 50 GND GND T 6 23 J3602 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 GND GND 2 IO ASIC_SCL_B IN OUT Head ROM controll signal clock 3 IO ASIC_SDA IN OUT Head ROM controll signal data 4 GND GND 5 H1 DSOUT 1 OUT Head temperature output signal 1 6 H1 DSOUT2 OUT Head temperature output signal 2 7 GND GND 8 H1 E DATA 8 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 8 E 9 GND GND 0 H1 D HE 7_B OUT Head L heat enable signal 7 D 1 GND GND 2 H1 D DATA 7 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 7 D 3 GND GND 4 H1 D DATA 6 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 6 D 5 GND GND 6 H1 D DATA 6 OD_B OUT Odd head L data signal 6 D 7 GND GND 8 H1 D HE 6_B OUT Head L heat enable signal 6 D 9 GND GND 20 H1 C HE 5_B OUT Head L heat enable signal 5 C 21 GND GND 22 H1 C DATA 5 OD_B OUT Odd head L data signal 5 C 23 GND GND 24 HI_CLK OUT Head L clock signal 25 GND GND 26 H1_LT_B OUT Head L latch signal 27 GND GND 28 H1 C DATA 5 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 5 C 29 GND GND 30 H1 B HE 3_B OUT Head L heat enable signal 3 B 31 GND GND 32 H1 C DATA 4 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 4 C 33 GND GND 34 H1 B DATA 3 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 3 B 35 GND GND 36 H1 B DATA 2 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 2 B 37 GND GND 38 H1 A DATA 1 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 1 A 39 GND GND 40 H1 A HE 1_B OUT Head L heat enable signal 1 A 41 GND GND 42 H1 A DATA 0 EV_B OUT Even hea
121. ace the main controller PCB E198 401D RTC low battery error Replace the lithium battery or replace the main controller PCB E198 401E RTC clock stop Replace the lithium battery or replace the main controller PCB E199 404B Temperature humidity sensor connector Check the temperature humidity sensor connector or replace the sensor firmware update E602 401A HDD read write error HDD failure Replace the HDD unit E602 401B HDD connection error Check the HDD connector or replace the HDD E144 4048 Printhead ink filling failure Replace the printhead E144 4047 Number of carrriage scan operation is full Replace the tube unit and then clear the parts counter in the service mode E196 4043 Memory error when execute the firmware Execute firmware update or replace the main controller PCB update E196 4044 Firmware size error when execute the Execute firmware update or replace the main controller PCB Mar 2 2010 Canon
122. ach mechanical component of the printer is given below 2 8 Chapter 2 2 3 2 Ink Passage 2 3 2 1 Ink Passage 2 3 2 1 1 Overview of Ink Passage The ink passage comprises ink tanks a printheads caps a maintenance jet tray a maintenance cartridge ink tubes interconnecting the mechanical components of the printer and a suction pump that is driven to suck inks It supplies circulates sucks and otherwise handles inks The ink passage per color is schematically shown below along with the ink flow Mechanical Drive Unit Ink or air flow Carriage unit Printhead Ink tank Needle air passage Piston Agitation fin Subtank Valve Agitation motor cam Maintenance cartridge F 2 8 a Supplying inks from the ink tanks to the ink supply valve assembly The ink tanks each contain an ink to feed the printhead Head differences allow the inks to flow from the ink tanks to the subtanks first then to the ink supply valves Air is discharged through the air passage of the subtanks to keep the internal pressure of the ink tanks constant b Supplying inks from the ink supply valves to the printhead The ink stored in an ink tank flows to the printhead when the suction pipe is driven with the ink supply valve opened and the head capped c Supplying inks while printing The ink supply valves are kept open while printing so that inks are constantly feeding to the printhead under the nega
123. ad management sensor and surrounding parts Check the flexible cable unit and surrounding parts Check that the printhead is attached correctly Replace the head management sensor Replace the main controller PCB Replace the printhead Replace the carriage unit Hardware error 03800500 2F41 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03800500 2F41 About all chips and nozzles of one color the non discharge is detected Check the ink tube unit and surrounding parts Check the purge unit and surrounding parts Check the head management sensor and surrounding parts Check the flexible cable unit and surrounding parts Check that the printhead is attached correctly Replace the main controller PCB Replace the printhead Replace the carriage unit Hardware error 03800500 2F42 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03800500 2F42 About single line A or B and all nozzles 1280 nozzles of one color the non discharge is detected Check the head management sensor and surrounding parts Check the flexible cable unit and surrounding parts Check that the printhead is attached correctly Replace the main controller PCB Replace the printhead Replace the carriage unit Hardware error 03800500 2F43 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03800500 2F43 About single chip A or B EVEN or ODD and all nozzles 640 nozzles of one color the non discharge is detected Ch
124. ade from 30 degrees centigrade Humidity 50 to 100 High humidity side not guaranteed Unknown 9 Borderless Bordered 1 Bordered printing 2 Borderless printing Unknown 10 Not Used 11 Print mode label No Display print mode Unknown 12 Media width Display media width Unit mm Unknown 13 Media type Display media name Unknown INK CHK Y PC C PGY GY BK Refill log 0 Disable remaining ink detection was never set PM M MBK R G B Print whether disable remaining ink detection was 1 Disable remaining ink detection was set at least previously set once Chapter 7 Print item Print content Printed value COUNTER PRINTE POWER ON Cumulative power on time Unit hours R SLEEP ON Cumulative sleep on time Unit hours CUTTER Number of cutting operations Unit times WIPE Number of wiping operations Unit times W INK Remaining capacity of the maintenance cartridge Unit PDL Cumulative number of printed media according to GARO xx sheets PDL HP GL 2 xx sheets CARRI PRINT Cumulative printing time Unit hours AGE DRIVE Cumulative carriage moving time Unit hours CR COUNT Cumulative carriage scan count count as I by moving Unit times back and forth CR DIST Cumulative carriage scan distance count as 1 by Unit times moving 210mm PRINT COUNT Cumulative print end count count as 1 by capping Unit times PURGE CLN A Cumulative number of automatic cleaning operations 1 Cumulative number of automat
125. aded or whether the media is compatible When the Media edge regular reflection gain is maximum values and Media edge regular reflection media output is 186 or less an error occurs Maximum value of media edge regular reflection gain 255 When the multi sensor and media are normal the following values are displayed T 7 17 Media edge regular Media edge regular reflection gain reflection media output Clear film About 10 60 About 500 600 Check 2 Check whether the multi sensor performance has degraded or whether the media is compatible When the difference between Media edge regular reflection gain and Media edge regular reflection platen output is 100 or less an error occurs When the multi sensor and media are normal the difference is about 250 500 Check 3 Check the effect of external diffuse light When the difference between Media edge regular reflection external light output and Media edge regular reflection platen output is 500 or more the effect of diffuse light is judged as being great When the effect is normal the difference is about 50 300 3 Checking OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 and OUTPUT OUTPUT 5 Check 1 Check whether the multi sensor performance has degraded or whether the media is compatible When GAP gain is maximum values and GAP media output is 93 or less an error occurs Maximum value of GAP gain 255 When the multi sensor and media are normal GAP
126. adjustment 1 Optical axis correction Service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt PRINT PATTERN gt OPTICAL AXIS Media type Gloss photo paper 2 Paper gap adjustment Service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt GAP CALIB e Action following the replacement of the carriage unit carriage motor carriage belt or linear encoder sensor After the carriage unit or carriage motor or carriage belt or linear encoder sensor have been removed or replaced execute the following service mode Service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt CR MOTOR COG Chapter 4 4 3 7 Ink Tube Unit a Removing ink tube unit 1 Drain the ink See Disassembly Reassembly gt Points to Note on Disassembly Reassembly gt Draining the ink 2 Remove the carriage unit See Disassembly Reassembly gt Points to Note on Disassembly Reassembly gt Carriage Unit 3 Disconnect five flexible cables from the main controller PCB 4 Remove the flexible cable leading to the carriage PCB cover from the guide 5 Remove three screws 1 and release ink tube fixer base 2 from the frame 3 mm i III 2 7 4 34 6 Remove joint 1 of the ink tube unit from left and right ink tank unit to remove ink tube unit 2 us D
127. alves manually Moving carriage when the power of the printer is off releasing carriage lock pin and uncapping must be done manually 1 Uncapping releasing the carriage lock pin and moving the wiper unit 1 Remove right circle cover L right circle cover S right side covers and upper right cover 2 Insert a Phillips screwdriver from the right side into hole 1 in the shaft of the lift unit in the purge unit and turn it counterclockwise This will lower cap 2 and lock pin 3 allowing the carriage to be moved The wiper unit will move in sync with the motion of the cap and lock pin 1 4 28 Chapter 4 4 3 15 Opening and closing ink supply valves a Opening and closing ink supply valves 1 Remove the ink tank cover unit 2 Press valve lever 1 with a finger to open the ink supply valve POE HIT dh mp op mp A el Sech d Ke 17 dl iS AE 15 E 1 LA ANT F 4 49 A If the printhead fixer lever is released with the ink supply valve to an ink tube open while the tube is filled with an ink the ink in the tube could flow backward to the ink tank unit leaking through the hollow needle in the ink tank If an ink supply valve remains open as on occurrence of an ink supply valve open close error remove the valve motor unit and see Disassembly Reassembly g
128. ance imageWARE Remote I U u nennen rne 7 26 7 455 Viewing PRINT INF ege er Bee Q i Ada 7 36 12 Special Gaa CEP 7 46 7 21 Special Modes for SOC aa aha kan 7 46 Chapter 8 ERROR CODE Bol CUMS NR Er a Eege pt 8 1 S MOUINE drites a a eaa ar O 8 1 A EE 8 2 8 2 1 Warnings hand id 8 2 83 Error TA A 8 5 SO Eros uy Ren AB MM EE EE EE EE 8 5 Tee UE e dani dd 8 15 84 Service Call ETTOIS do aayqa 8 15 Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Contents Contents ProductOVEVIE Sii 1 11 Product OVervieW E 1 2 Fe tures dt da 1525 dat taa ES eios SP 1 2 2 Printhead IPS M ru RNA IUSSI BI M a e 12 SROUh lder ER BATT eine X RP AYRVUCHEREL CIC WD Bard disk idee Ea ROT PE trt EE RO D Mte ertet 5 pne ere eR NR T 29 Consumables A seder 1 3 Product SpecttiCations esee rr tenete e eie oe rem er bee eb re o e eet deiecti co eet 1 3 1 Product Specifications gd He ne ele h e e P e e beers L t Detailed Specifications is 1 41 Interface Specifications nenz eR aet iiem ote iere de e etn e RER 1 5 Names and Functions of Components 1 5 1 rei see 2 A TTE 1 5 3 Top Cover Inside LEI as Kss Ink Tank CIAO Er e re Nd NAE de de ad EEA EME 1 6 Basic Operatio
129. and keys These screens display the associated sensor status as listed in the table below T 7 12 Display position Sensor name LCD display contents 1 Pump Cam Sensor 0 Sensor ON 1 Sensor OFF 2 Valve open closed detection sensor R 0 Sensor ON 1 Sensor OFF 3 Agitation cam sensor L 0 Sensor ON 1 Sensor OFF 4 Agitation cam sensor R 0 Sensor ON 1 Sensor OFF 5 Not Used 6 Lift cam sensor 0 Sensor ON 1 Sensor OFF 7 Feed roller HP sensor 0 Sensor ON 1 Sensor OFF 8 Upper cover lock switch 0 Cover open 1 Cover close 9 Carriage cover sensor 0 Cover open 1 Cover close 10 Ink tank cover switch R 0 Cover open 1 Cover close 11 Ink tank cover switch L 0 Cover open 1 Cover close 12 Not Used 13 Not Used 14 Not Used 15 Not Used 16 Not Used 17 Not Used 18 Not Used 19 Not Used 20 Not Used 21 Not Used 22 Carriage HP sensor 0 Sensor ON 1 Sensor OFF 23 Pressure release switch 0 Realeased 1 Pressured 24 Media sensor 0 No media 1 Media loaded 25 Not Used 26 Not Used 27 Not Used 28 Media take up unit detection 0 Undetected 1 Detected 29 Media take up sensor input signal 0 LO 1 HI 30 Valve open closed detection sensor L 0 Sensor ON 1 Sensor OFF 31 Not Used 32 Not Used 33 No
130. anel This section explains the functions of the buttons and the meanings of the LEDs on the operation panel pg 091 HI 114 8 5 BI Bl k TI 1 M na 7 6 4 1 21 1 Display Printer menus statuses and messages are shown on this display 2 Power button Use this button to turn on or off the printer When the printer is powered or in the sleep mode the Power button lamp stays lit 3 Stop button Use this button to stop execution of a job or drying ink 4 Navi button Use this key to confirm the procedures for loading unloading media replacing an ink tank and replacing the printhead 5 Direction buttons lt button Pressing this button on the tab selection screen moves the tab When a menu requiring you to enter a value is selected pressing this button allows you to move to the left hand digit A button Pressing this button in a menu displays the upper item or setting value P button Pressing this button on the tab selection screen moves the tab When a menu requiring you to enter a value is selected pressing this button allows you to move to the right hand digit Y button Pressing this button in a menu displays the lower item or setting value 6 OK button Pressing this button on the tab selection screen displays the menu for the displayed tab In the menu for a tab
131. ank into a container Repeat this procedure for each additional subtank F 4 50 4 30 Chapter 4 4 4 Applying the Grease 4 4 1 Applying the Grease Apply the grease at the location shown below Smear the grease lightly and evenly with a flat brush A Don t apply the grease to locations other than those designated Unwanted grease may cause poor print quality take particular care that grease does not get onto the wiper cap or the linear scale T 4 1 No Place Kind Quantity Note 1 The joint base rail and rib of carriage unit Molykote PG 641 Smear the grease lightly 2 Two feed roller backup Permalub G No 2 approx 12mg Don t apply to central backup with bearing Bushing Permalub G No 2 Smear the grease lightly 3 Feed roller bearing Permalub G No 2 approx 24mg Apply if remove bearing from a feed roller 4 Pinch roller release cam three points x 10 parts Permalub G No 2 Smear the grease lightly 5 Upper cover stay shaft hole Permalub G No 2 approx 24mg The gear shaft of the upper cover stay gear Permalub G No 2 approx 24mg Upper cover stay shaft end Permalub G No 2 approx 24mg The gear tooth face of upper cover stay Permalub G No 2 Smear the grease lightly 1 The joint base rail 1 and the rib 2 of the carriage unit 4 31 Chapter 4 2 Two feed roller backup 1 bushing 2 3 Feed roller bearing 3 F 4 52 4 Pinch roller release cam
132. annot obtain the result after 30 seconds from the start of a communication test the test is considered failed and the same screen will appear When the communication test was successful it is necessary to take the interval of 5 minutes before performing the next communication test 4 Communication Log COM LOG Communication Error Information Detailed Communication Error Information can be displayed on the screen at the time of a communication error with the Service Center including proxy server error When a communication error occurs you can refer to this information to study how to deal with the problem For the countermeasure corresponding to each Communication Error Information or Detailed Communication Error Information see the list of error message in 4 Troubleshoot 1 In service mode referring to the Service Mode Menu Tree go to COM LOG menu using key and Y key E RDS COM LOG F 7 39 2 Press Y key and communication error information is displayed On the upper line of the LCD a log number 01 30 and an error code are shown on the bottom line an occurrence date and time of the error is shown 0 1 X X X X X X X X H YY YY MM DD HH MM F 7 40 COM LOG information can be saved up to 30 cases Use Right and Left keys to change logs to display Logs are displayed in the sequence of the time of occurrence Log number 1 is the latest log Press key to exit this operation mode and go back
133. ar of the printer are the main controller power supply interface connector and optional media take up unit connector The head relay PCB and carriage relay PCB are incorporated in the carriage unit and the operation panel is located on the upper right cover When servicing the printer with the cover removed be extremely careful to avoid electric shock and shorting contacts 1 2 F 1 39 T 1 24 1 1 5 Power Supply 2 Carriage relay PCB 6 Main controller PCB 3 Head relay PCB 7 Interface connector 4 AC inlet 8 Media take up unit connector 1 41 Chapter 1 1 7 2 Other Precautions 1 7 2 1 Printhead 1 How to Handle the Printhead Do not open the printhead package until you are ready to install the head When installing the printhead in the printer hold the knob 1 and then remove the protective cap 1 2 and protective cap 2 3 in that order Do not reattach the protective cap 2 3 to the printhead because the cap may damage the nozzles 4 To prevent the nozzles from getting clogged with foreign matter or dried ink install the printhead immediately after you remove the protective caps Also make sure to press down the locking lever of the printhead until you feel a click In addition to prevent clogging of the nozzles with foreign matter and improper supply of ink never touch the nozzles 4 or ink port 6 or wipe it with tissue paper or anything else Do not touch Elect
134. arriage moves when the heads are capped the rubber part of the cap may touch the nozzles on the heads and damage the print head 3 Close the upper cover 4 Remove the paper and roll holder 5 Remove power cord and interface cable 6 Unlock the casters on the stand and move the printer slowly A If the printer is subjected to strong vibrations when it is moved it can cause ink leakage or damage to the print head Be sure to move the printer slowly and carefully Chapter 3 b LEVEL 1 Moving the printer on a floor with difference in grade or by truck T 3 2 Item Description Prep MovePrinter on the Main menu Perform LEVEL 1 Allowed tilting angle Lengthwise 30 to 30 degrees Rotation 10 to 10 degrees Ink consumption No ink is consumed Ink tank It may be installed or removed Separation of main unit and stand They do not need to be separated Maintenance cartridge Install There is no need to open a new maintenance cartridge However if there is a message instructing to replace the maintenance cartridge or check the remaining ink replace with new maintenance cartridge before transporting Replacement of consumable parts Replacement of consumable parts and resetting of counter may be necessary Service support If consumable parts must be replaced service support is necessary Transportation procedure
135. arriage unit or multi sensor has been replaced they should require adjustment Execute service mode under the following conditions to launch automatic adjustment 1 Optical axis correction Service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt PRINT PATTERN gt OPTICAL AXIS Media type Photo glossy paper Media size Media having a width equal toor larger then that of A2 size paper 2 Paper gap adjustment Service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt GAP CALIB c Carriage Motor Adjustment After the carriage and carriage motor and carriage belt and linear encoder sensor has been removed or replaced execute the following service mode Service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt CR MOTOR COG 4 5 3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder Feed roller eccentricity is factory adjusted correction of variation in the paper feed amount per rotation It is necessary to adjust feed roller eccentricity after re placing the feed roller encoder or feed roller In the service mode perform automatic adjustment of feed roller eccentricity Service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt PRINT PATTERN gt LF TUNING Media type Photo glossy paper If adjustment cannot be done properly by selecting SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt PRINT PATTERN gt LF TUNING auto adjustment carry out manual ad justment Service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt PRINT PATTERN gt LF TUNING2 Media type Gloss photo paper Check the printed pa
136. at enable signal 5 C 38 GND GND 39 H0 D HE 6 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 6 D 40 GND GND 41 H0 D DATA 6 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 6 D 42 GND GND 43 H0 D DATA 6 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 6 D 44 GND GND 45 H0 D DATA 7 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 7 D 46 GND GND 47 H0 D HE 7 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 7 D 48 OUT ENB OUT Head data enable signal 49 HO E DATA 8 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 8 E 50 GND GND 6 15 Chapter 6 T 6 29 J201 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 ENCODER_B IN Linear encoder sensor output signal B 2 GND GND 3 ENCODER_A IN Linear encoder sensor output signal A 4 SNS_5V OUT Power supply 5V T 6 30 J202 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 SNS_5V OUT Power supply 5V 2 GND GND 3 CRCOVER IN Carriage cover sensor output signal T 6 31 J701 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 H3V OUT Power supply 2 VHI_FB IN feed back voltage 3 VHI OUT Power supply 4 VHI OUT Power supply 5 VHI OUT Power supply 6 VHI OUT Power supply 7 VHI OUT Power supply 8 VHI OUT Power supply 9 GND GND 10 GND GND 11 GND GND 12 GND GND 13 GND GND 14 GND GND 15 GND GND 16 VH2 OUT Power supply 17 VH2 OUT Power
137. ative print area of paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches physical size m2 Sq f P SQ 36 44 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches physical size m2 Sq f P SQ 24 36 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches physical size m2 Sq f P SQ 17 24 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches physical size m2 Sq f P SQ 17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches physical size m2 Sq f P CNT 44 60 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches sheets physical size P CNT 36 44 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches sheets physical size P CNT 24 36 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches sheets physical size P CNT 17 24 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches sheets physical size P CNT 17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper less than 17 inches physical size sheets 15 MEDIASIZE2 CUT Counters related to cut sheet printing T 7 33 Display Description Unit D SQ 44 60 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches data size m2 Sq f D SQ 36 44 Cumulati
138. be which runs between the tube guides via joints to reach the carriage and follow its movement F 2 11 T 2 4 1 Carriage motor 2 Printhead fixer lever 3 Printhead fixer cover 4 Electrical contact 5 Ink tube c Controller The Carriage relay PCB is connected to the head relay PCB by means of a short flexible cable The flexible cable between the main controller and the carriage relay PCB follows up the motion of the carriage together with the tube guide A photocoupler encoder mounted in the lower part of the back of the carriage detects a linear scale reading as the carriage moves d Carriage drive Mechanical misregistrations in the vertical horizontal and bidirectional print positions of the printhead mounted can be corrected by selecting Adjust Printer from the main menu to shift the print timing A DC operated carriage motor drives the carriage reciprocally on the platen by way of the carriage belt The carriage home position or the capping position is detected by the sensor flag on the right side of the carriage and the photointerrupter based carriage HP sensor on the right side of the printer When the linear scale position is set as a reference home position for use in subsequent position control operations the carriage motor is driven by a control signal generated from the main controller PCB e Printhead maintenance unit This printer cleans the printhead with the carriage halted at its home position Wiping take
139. ble Check roll position Online Print Load Eject Change Paper 03861001 2405 Paper loaded at a position inaccessible for borderless printing Check to see if a borderless printing spacer is installed Reload the paper Insufficient paper for job Online Print Stop Stop Printing Load Eject Change Paper 03862000 2E09 Not enough roll media on remaining roll media quantity detection Renew the supply of roll media Cannot cut paper Lift the release lever and reload the paper 03870001 2015 Cutting failure Cut paper manually Check the cutter Cannot adjust optic axis Press Online to clear the error 03863000 2824 Optical axis error Check the multi sensor Check the head management sensor Borderless printng not possible Check paper size setting 03861001 2406 Data unfit for borderless printing Check the data and then print again Mail box full Delete unwanted data on your computer to resume printing Press Stop to cancel printing 031A 1001 2905 The job store executed when the free hard disk space left for Personal Boxes in the printer s hard disk is full Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes Mail box full Cannot save Delete unwanted data on your computer to resume printing Press Stop to cancel printing 031A 1006 2906 The store executed when 32 jobs are stored in the Personal Box Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal B
140. bly at printing Each printhead has 12 trains of nozzles arranged in a zigzag pattern This printer uses two printheads arranged side by side In installed state from left to right PC C MBK Y M PM R G B PGY GY PBK Print signals directed at each nozzle train are even numbered nozzle data Hx x DATA x EV and odd numbered nozzle data Hx x DATA x OD These are transferred in timing with a data transfer clock Hx CLK and data latch pulses Hx LT The Heat Enable Hx x HE x drive control signal enables inks to be discharged from the nozzles 1 Pint drive control Each train of nozzles in a printhead has 2 560 nozzles Ink discharge nozzles are selected split in 40 20 or 10 nozzle blocks according to the Block Enable information in the even numbered nozzle data and odd num bered nozzle data Each selected block of nozzles is impressed with a Heat Enable signal generated with variable pulse widths according to the head rank head temperature and printer temperature for optimized ink discharges The nozzles are driven by heater boards in the nozzles to discharge inks Optimal nozzle blocks are selected according to the print path The diagram below illustrates the relationship between a 40 block nozzle and nozzles driven 123456 7 8 9 1011 121314151617 181920212223 24252627282930313233343536373839 Block No bi Printhead nozzle No DEET TEE
141. by LEVEL 2 or LEVEL 3 If ink drainage was performed when transporting by LEVEL 2 or LEVEL 3 follow the installation procedure which is nearly identical to the procedure when in stalling for the first time 3 14 Chapter 3 3 15 Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY REASSEMBLY Contents Contents 4 1 SEr VIER ii ais 411 Service A CD RERO REM A AUD Ni 4 2 Disassembly Reassembly 5 pite etri tee e RR RT e Eee OE Pe PH obs pub ps 4 2 1 Disassembly Reassembly 4 3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly 4 3 1 Note on locations prohibited from d sassembly essent nennen 4 3 2 Moving the carriage manually 4 3 3 Units requiring draining of ink 43 A External Covers eere eme dne tens rit enitn A ee EE 435 Dive DO EE 43 6 EEN 4 3 7 Ink Tub BEE 43 8 Feeder RN u E usu au 4 3 9 Purge Utd A Ree 43 10 mik Tank EE 43 1T Eine t Ee EE 4 3 12 Head Management A RS 43 13 PGBS eec pt e eae TR A dar ne 4 3 14 Opening the cap and moving wiper unit m 4315 Opening nd closing ink supply Valves rien cie lia 4 3 16 Draiming eie ee Hen RO e a e aae e e a de pr Oe n ed a e a a t EE es 4 4 Applying the Grease a epe pi 4 4 1 APplyms the Grease zn ee UE RECEIVER BOSE EO OH UI 45 Adjustment and Setup Items repite es etre i eet iab sn eve ee dee 4541 Adjustment Item 196 a te A dn ede e ras 4 5 2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriag
142. ct either roll paper or cut sheet Eject Paper Choose this item before removing loaded paper Chg Paper Type Change currently set paper type Chg Paper Size Change currently set paper size ManageRemainRoll Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it The printed barcode can be used in managing the amount of roll paper left ChooseOff if you prefer not to print the barcode Paper Details Head Height Adjust the Printhead height The paper type is displayed Skew Check Lv If you print on the paper that has an irregular width choose Loose for a higher skew detection here threshold or choose Off to disable skew detection However if paper is loaded askew when detection is Off note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur Cutting Mode Select whether to use standard round blade cutter or not Select Automatic to cut paper after printing Select Manual to print a line at the cut position after printing without cutting Select Eject to prevent the printout from dropping until the ink dries after printing Cut Speed Choose the cutting speed If you use adhesive paper choosing Slow helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp Trim Edge First If a roll is loaded the end of the paper will be cut CutDustReduct Choose On to reduce the amount of debris generated when cutting film and similar media by printing a line at the cut position This option reduces
143. cuum holes on the Platen 1 the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves 2 or cutter guide 3 use the included Cleaning Brush 4 to wipe it away MEMO If the Cleaning Brush is dirty rinse it in water 5 2 Chapter 5 4 Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely wipe inside the Top Cover to clean it Wipe away any ink residue on the Top Cover Roller 1 all over the Platen 2 the Pinch Roller Unit 3 the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves 4 the Ejection Guide 5 the cutter guide 6 the maintenance jet tray 7 and so on wawas FD z F 5 3 Chapter 5 A Do not dry the interiors of the top cover with a dry cloth Electrostatic charges could make the internal components susceptible to dirt resulting in degraded print quality Do not use flammable solvents such as thinner and benzine on the printer Solvents coming into contact with any electrical parts inside the printer could result in fires or electrical shock hazards Do not touch linear scale 1 and carriage shaft 2 Chapter 5 5 5 Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Contents Contents 6 1 Troubleshooting Sa iaa 6 1 0 1 1 A is 6 1 6 11 T Outlme of Troubleshooting gefeiert te BR DH bs a e E e Fee ia iones 6 1 6 2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement 6 1 6 2 1 Main controller PCB 6 2 2 Carriage relay PCB 6 2 3 Head relay PCB 6 3 Version Up
144. d key and Navigate key Keep pressing the above keys until Initializing is displayed 3 S appears at the top right of the display 4 Press the lt key or P gt key to choose the Set Adj Menu and press the OK key SERVICE MODE appears in the menu list and the MESSAGE LED flashes 5 Press the A key or Y key to choose SERVICE MODE and press the OK key Service mode is added to the Set Adj Menu Service mode can be entered even when an error occurs an error message is displayed by turning off the power once and then pressing the above keys b How to exit the Service mode Turn off the printer c Key operation in the service mode Selecting menus and paremeters or key Going to the next lower level menu Y key Going to the previous higher level menu key Determining a selected menu or parameter OK key Chapter 7 7 1 2 Map of the Service Mode The hierarchy of menus and parameters in the Service Mode is as shown below 7 2 T 7 1 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level DISPLAY PRINTINF YES NO Select YES to print SYSTEM S N TYPE LF TYPE TMP RH SIZE LF SIZE LF SIZE CR SIZE CR AFTER INST HEAD S N L S NR LOTL LOTR INK PC BK WARNING 01 20 ERROR 01 20 JAM 01 05
145. d L data signal 0 A 43 GND GND 44 H1 A HE 0_B OUT Head L heat enable signal 0 A 45 GND GND 46 H1 A DATA 0 OD_B OUT Odd head L data signal 0 A 47 GND GND Chapter 6 J3602 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 48 VHT_ENB OUT VHT enable signal 49 HV_ENB OUT HV enable signal 50 FFC_SLANT_DET_SNS Chapter 6 6 2 2 Carriage relay PCB 6 12 1 ve 6 2 6 24 J101 Pin Number Signal name INOUT Function 1 VMGND GND 2 VMGND GND 3 VMGND GND 4 VMGND GND 5 VM OUT Power supply 32V 6 VM OUT Power supply 32V 7 VM OUT Power supply 32V 8 VM OUT Power supply 32V 9 VM OUT Power supply 32V 10 VM OUT Power supply 32V 11 VM OUT Power supply 32V 12 VM OUT Power supply 32V 13 SNS5V OUT Power supply 5V 14 SNS5V OUT Power supply 5V 15 GND GND 16 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 17 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 18 GND GND 19 VM 26V OUT Power supply 26V 20 VMGND GND 21 VH MONI3 IN VH controll signal 3 22 VH MONII IN VH controll signal 1 23 VMGND GND 24 VMGND GND 25 VMGND GND T 6 25 J102 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 GND GND
146. d Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Paper Details The paper type is displayed here Scan Wait Time Off 1 sec 3 sec 5 sec 7 sec 9 sec Roll DryingTime Off 30 sec 1 min 3 min 5 min 10 min 30 min 60 min NearEnd RollMrgn 5mm 20mm NearEnd Sht Mrgn 5mm 20mm Bordless Margin Automatic Fixed Width Detection Off On Return Defaults Paper Details Keep Paper Type Off On Chapter 1 Ink Menu Job Menu T 1 6 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Rep Ink Tank Head Cleaning A T 1 7 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Print Job Job List Select Print Job Delete Preempt Jobs 11 Stored Job Mailbox List Enter a password if one has Job List Print been set Delete Print Job List Job Log Choose from information Document Name about the latest three print User Name jobs Page Count Job Status OK CANCELED Print Start Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Print End Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Print Time xxxsec Print Size XXXXXXXxsq mm Media Type Interface USB Network HDD
147. d capped Cleaning Normal lg printing Cleaning Before printing in the wake of an error occurrence Cleaning 1 Normal lg Cleaning Printing Before scanning while printing Idle ejection Wiping 0 0139 After the end A specified number of dots color discharged per chip since the last session of Cleaning 2 3 6 1 Cleaning 6 Normal Sg of printing strong Cleaning A specified number of dots discharged per chip after the last session of wiping Wiping Idle ejection 0 013g 3 minutes elapsed since the last session of capping Wiping Idle ejection 0 013g Total 2 hours elapsed uncapped since the last session of Cleaning 1 2 3 6 or 10 Cleaning Normal lg Cleaning When the Manual Cleaning Head Cleaning A Cleaning 1 Normal lg Head Cleaning Cleaning Manual cleaning Head cleaning B Cleaning 6 Normal 5g menu choice strong Cleaning is executed When the After head replacement Cleaning 2 ink level 10g Replace Print adjustment and Head menu cleaning Cleaning 4 choice is ink drainage for head executed replacement When the After the Move Printer menu choice is executed Cleaning 5 ink drainage 10g Move Printer for secondary transport menu choice After power on at secondary installation After power on at 15g is executed secondary installation 1 Quantities o ink consumption by nozzle train Chapter 2 2 3 2 5 2 Structure of Purge Unit a Caps The caps cap the nozzle assembly in t
148. d data signal 41 ADI6 IN OUT Address and data signal 42 CBE2 OUT Bus command and byte enable signal 43 GND GND 44 FRAME IN OUT Cycle frame signal 45 IRDY IN OUT Initiator ready signal 46 TRDY IN OUT Target ready signal 47 DEVSEL IN OUT Device select signal 48 GND GND 49 STOP IN OUT Stop signal 50 LOCK IN OUT Lock signal 51 PERP IN OUT Parity error signal 52 SERR IN OUT System error signal 53 PAR IN OUT Parity signal 54 CBEI IN OUT Bus command and byte enable signal 55 GND GND 56 GND GND 57 ADIS IN OUT Address and data signal 58 AD14 IN OUT Address and data signal 59 AD13 IN OUT Address and data signal 60 AD12 IN OUT Address and data signal 61 GND GND 62 ADII IN OUT Address and data signal 63 ADIO IN OUT Address and data signal 64 AD9 IN OUT Address and data signal 65 AD8 IN OUT Address and data signal 66 CBEO IN OUT Bus command and byte enable signal 67 GND GND 68 AD7 IN OUT Address and data signal 69 AD6 IN OUT Address and data signal 70 ADS IN OUT Address and data signal 71 AD4 IN OUT Address and data signal 72 GND GND 73 AD3 IN OUT Address and data signal 74 AD2 IN OUT Address and data signal Chapter 6 J1102 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function
149. d to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is High while 0 is used to indicate Low The voltage value how ever differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically all cases the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field Therefore the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes and major changes will be com municated in the form of Service Information bulletins All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine Contents Contents Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION TEMP TO Overview Rene 1 1 1 1 1 PTOUCCO V iii niente 1 1 ERR EEN 1 3 NA eR BM Uem a 1 3 Elia AG cuca a b UTERINE UND IER im oberen ius 1 3 1 2 3 RA di AA E 1 3 LLAGAS o ESS 1 4 125 Roll e TEE 1 4 Ee EE 1 5 1 2 7 take up Ult e el ep cte ts ee A ee eh de ide 1 6 12 S Hara disk drive cot m D UR ene 1 7 1 29 Consumab
150. dia Take up Unit Choose Off to have the printer pause before printing if a rewinding error occurs Prep MovePrint er Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Select when moving the printer Follow the instruction on the screen and perform the necessary process This is not displayed when displaying a warning message about the amount remaining maintenance cartridge Admin Menu Change Password Set a password to restrict displaying setting of menus as follows Allowed value is from 0 to 9999999 Allow only administrator to display set IPv4 Change Password Init Admin Pswd Allow administrator to display set and non administrator to display only Interface Setup exclude IPv4 Date amp Time Date Format Time Zone Use RemoteUI Reset PaprSetngs Save Shared Box Init Admin Pswd Press OK to return the Administrator Menu password to factory default Printer Info Paper Info Indicates the current paper size type and related printer settings Ink Info Indicates ink levels and maintenance cartridge capacity Head Info Indicates information about the printhead System Info Indicates the firmware version serial number and interface information Error Log Indicates the most recent error messages up to five Other Counter Indicates the total printing volume of the printer 1 31 Chapter 1
151. e Unit or Multi Sensor 4 5 3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder 4 5 4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor Chapter 4 4 1 Service Parts 4 1 1 Service Parts The service parts indicated below require careful handling 1 Keep all packages with the warning not to turn over Pay careful attention to all individually packaged service part carriage unit purge unit ink tank unit and other parts boxes marked This side up and handle appropriately Y F 4 1 2 Feed roller The feed roller is a functionally important part Therefore be careful that the roller is not scratched or marked during storage or transport of the service parts when removing them from the individual boxes when assembling or performing any other operations Chapter 4 4 2 Disassembly Reassembly 4 2 1 Disassembly Reassembly See Parts Catalog for the process of disassembly and reassembly except for the following main units Main units are the following four units 1 Carriage unit 2 Ink tube unit 3 Purge unit 4 Ink tank unit The parts layout illustrations in parts catalog have figure numbers according to the disassembly procedure of the product Main unit disassembly and assembly flows Ink drainage in a dotted line performs manual or automatic either 1 Carriage Unit Disassembly Flow Legend Connector h Hook s Screw d Automatic ink drain Left right circle co
152. e cut sheet 03863000 2826 Eccentricity correction error Check to see if paper has not jammed 03863000 282A Carriage motor rotation adjustment error Check the carriage unit and surrounding parts Replace the carriage motor 03863000 282B Carriage motor rotation adjustment error when detecting the vibration Check the carriage unit and surrounding parts Replace the carriage motor Hardware error 03130000 2E21 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130000 2E21 IEEE 1394 port error Check the IEEE 1394 board is attached correctly Replace the IEEE1394 board Replace the main controller PCB Cannot calibrate Press OK and try calibration again 03863000 2F34 Color calibration adjustment failure error Check the environment for interferences from outside light Replace the multi sensor unit Calibration There is a problem with the multi sensor Press OK to cancel calibration 03130031 2F35 Color calibration disabled Check the parts counter in service mode Replace the multi sensor unit Chapter 8 8 4 Sevice Call Table 8 4 1 Service Call Errors Codes correspond to the numbers shown on the DISPLAY in the service mode T 8 3 Code Description Action E141 4046 Number of recovery rotations reaching 50 000 or more Replace the purge unit and then clear the parts counter in the service mode E146 4
153. e parts Replacement of consumable parts and resetting of counter may be necessary Service support If consumable parts must be replaced service support is necessary Transportation procedure 1 If there is a message instructing to replace the maintenance cartridge or check the remaining ink replace the maintenance cartridge 2 Remove the paper and roll holder 3 From Set Adj Menu gt Prep MovePrinter select LEVEL 2 or LEVEL 3 4 Press the OK key and perform LEVEL 2 or LEVEL 3 MOVE PRINTER 5 If the counter is checked and a message to replace consumable parts appear check the consumable parts counter from service mode and replace the necessary consumable part See d Replacing consumable parts during transportation Repeat LEVEL 2 or LEVEL 3 after replacing consumable parts and resetting the counter 6 Follow the displayed message and open the left and right ink tank covers 3 8 Chapter 3 7 Raise the ink tank lock lever and remove all ink tanks A Put the removed ink tanks in the plastic bag with the ink supply part 1 upward and close the opening 1 F 3 13 8 Return the ink tank lock lever and close the ink tank cover Ink drainage is performed automatically Replace the maintenance cartridee when the cartridee replacement message appears 9 When MOVE PRINTER completed message appears turn off the power and remove the power cord and interface cable
154. e printhead Wrong printhead Open top cover and replace the printhead 03800200 2811 Printhead version error Replace the printhead No maintenance cartridge Check the maintenance cartridge 03841101 2818 Mauntenance cartridge not installed Install the maintenance cartridge This type of media is not compatible with HP GL 2 03860006 2825 Paper type mismatch at HP GL 2 printing Exchange for the compatible paper to HP GL 2 before reprinting Cannot cut paper Lift the release lever and reload the paper 03870001 2019 Cut failure during jam occure Check the cutter unit and surrounding parts Replace the cutter Insufficient paper for job 03862001 2E31 Not enough roll media Renew the supply of roll media Insufficient paper for job 03862002 2E32 Not enough roll media lower roll Renew the supply of roll media Paper jam 03010000 2E3A Madia load failure Check the pick up unit and roll media Manually rewind roll all the Check to see if paper has not jammed way and press OK Paper jam 03010000 2E3B Madia load failure lower roll Check the pick up unit and roll media Manually rewind roll all the Check to see if paper has not jammed way and press OK Roll printing is selected Press Load Eject and load a roll 03060A00 2E35 Roll media is not loaded for internal printing Reload the roll media 8 11 Chapter 8
155. eck the head management sensor and surrounding parts Check the flexible cable unit and surrounding parts Check that the printhead is attached correctly Replace the main controller PCB Replace the printhead Replace the carriage unit Hardware error 03800500 2F44 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03800500 2F44 The non discharge of the EVEN or ODD line 640 nozzles is detected Check the head management sensor and surrounding parts Check that the printhead is attached correctly Replace the main controller PCB Replace the printhead Replace the carriage unit Hardware error 03800500 2F2F Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03800500 2F2F The non discharge of the EVEN or ODD line 640 nozzles is detected the 320 nozzles or more Check the head management sensor and surrounding parts Check that the printhead is attached correctly Replace the head management sensor Replace the printhead Chapter 8 Display massage Code Condition detected Action Hardware error 03800500 2F30 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03800500 2F30 Detectable area failure when adjusting the position of non discharging nozzle The gap of detection position of nozzle both ends is big Check the ink tube unit and surrounding parts Check the purge unit and surrounding parts Check the head management sensor and surroundi
156. elected choose Fixed In this case the paper width is not detected automatically and the document is printed without borders using the margin settings required by the printer Width Detection Make this setting when the print size is different from the media size for example when you want to make a print within a frame When you select OFF the paper width is not detected Return Defaults Choose OK to restore Paper Details to the factory default values Print Paper Detail Print the paper settings set with Paper Details Keep Paper Type Select On to continue using the same type of paper 1 26 Chapter 1 Ink Menu Job Menu T 1 15 Setting Item Description Instructions Rep Ink Tank When replacing the Ink Tank choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen Head Cleaning A Specify Printhead cleaning options Execute Head Cleaning A if printing is faint oddly colored or contains foreign substances T 1 16 Setting Item Description Instructions Print Job Job List Select Print Delete Delete the current job or queued jobs Job Preempt Jobs Print the job first after the current print job is finished printing Stored Job Mailbox List Enter a Job List Prints a saved job password if Print one has been Job List Deletes a saved job set Delete Print Job List Prints a list
157. emperature changes in the printer is transmitted to the main controller via the carriage relay PCB The ambient temperature is used to help calibrate the head temperature sensor and detect abnormal ambient temperatures Head temperature sensor The head temperature sensor detects the temperature of the printhead The printhead temperature is transmitted to the main controller via the carriage relay PCB The printhead temperature is used to help control the head drive and detect abnormal printhead temperatures Printhead contact detection The printhead contact detects the status of printhead installation by electrical means The contact detects the status of contact from voltage changes in the flexible cables on the carriage side that come into contact with two terminals of the printhead with remote contact surfaces the power terminals and GND terminal Multi sensor The photo reflection type multi sensor is composed of four LEDs red blue green and infrared and two light sensitive sensors It detects the leading edge skewing and width of media and is used for adjustment of the registration head height and color calibration During head adjustment the light reflected by the infrared LED and green LED is detected by two light sensitive sensors to calculate the head height from the difference between the measurements When color calibration is executed a color chart printed is read with three color LED red blue green so color correction
158. ensor output signal 6 TANK COVER R IN Right ink tank cover switch output signal 7 GND GND 8 SNS3V OUT Power supply 3V 9 GND GND 10 INKBEN CAM R IN Right ink tank agitation cam sensor output signal T 6 9 J2601 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 POWER_ON IN Power switch signal 2 GND GND 3 RGV20 5V OUT Power supply 5V 4 BUZZER OUT Buzzer control signal 5 PDO OUT Panel IC control signal 6 RGV29 5V OUT Power supply 5V 7 PDI OUT Panel IC data signal 8 HDD_LED OUT HDD lamp control signal 9 PRESET OUT Panel reset signal 10 GND GND 11 PCK OUT Panel IC clock signal 12 PANEL_5V OUT Power supply 5V 13 PCS OUT Panel IC chip select signal T 6 10 J2701 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function Al GND GND Chapter 6 J2701 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function A2 LF_ENCB IN Feed roller encoder sensor output signal B A3 LF_ENC_ 5V OUT Power supply 5V A4 LF_ENCA IN Feed roller encoder sensor output signal A AS SNS3V OUT Power supply 3 3V A6 GND GND A7 LF_HP IN Feed roller HP sensor output signal A8 N C N C A9 N C N C 10 N C N C All N C N C Bl VM_26V OUT Power supply 26V B2 KYUINFAN_ALARM_IN IN Suction fan alarm signal B3 KYUINFAN
159. er of days passed since the R ink tank was installed Day s Number of days passed since the G ink tank was installed Day s B Number of days passed since the B ink tank was installed Day s 5 WARNING Displays the warning history up to 20 events The newest event has the smallest history number 6 ERROR Displays the error history up to 20 events The newest event has the smallest history number 7 JAM Displays log of jams that have occurred up to five events The newest event has the smallest history number Indicates the date and time of jam and error code 0000 is displayed if there is no log F 7 1 7 9 Chapter 7 Press the Y key to display detail information Press the Y key or key to navigate among detail information display 1 to 4 Detail information display 1 45 67 8 9 10 F 7 2 Detail information display 2 Detail information display 3 E gt lt o Detail information display 4 F 7 5 T 7 11 Display Description LCD display contents 1 Jam type Carriage error 2 Jam 3 Feed failure delay 4 Cut failure Unknown 2 Media Roll media 2 Cut sheet manual feed from top 3 Cut sheet manual feed from front 4 Cassette Unknown 3 Jam timing 1 Feed 2 Print 3 Eject Unknown 4 Media width detection ON 2 OFF Unknown 5 Head height 0 SL 1 2mm 1 L 1 4mm 2 M1 1 8mm 3 M2 2 0mm 4 M3 2 2mm
160. erating the ink discharge timing It also counts the linear scale timing cycle using the reference clock to measure the carriage moving speed Dot count function This function controls the discharge dots used as the information for Heat Enable signal control maintenance jet control cleaning control and remaining ink level for each nozzle array Operation panel control function This function controls serial communication with the operation panel PWM control function This function controls driving of the suction fan and mist fan as well as the temperature of the printhead Remaining ink level detection function This function detects the remaining level of each color of ink based on the signal received from the hollow needle mounted in the ink tank unit LED control function This function controls the LEDs on the ink tank unit V O port function This function controls input signals from sensors Power ON OFF control function This function controls turning on off of the drive power 26 V and 21 5 V supplied from the power supply PCB Head DI sensor read control function This function controls read operation by the head DI sensor Multi sensor control function This function controls the LED adjusts the gain and controls obtainment of the reading for the multi sensor 2 28 Chapter 2 EEPROM control function This function controls the EEPROMs of individual ink tanks the maintenance cartridge EEPROM the EEPROM on the maintena
161. erred Transmit valid ROM data Unknown file Check file format Turn off printer wait a while then turn it on again 03900001 4042 MIT data transfer failure Verify the validity of MID data before transferring it Hardware error 03130031 2F2B Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F2B LF operation failure Check to see if paper has not jammed Check the feed motor and feed roller Printhead error Open top cover and replace the printhead 03800200 2802 Invalid printhead installed Replace printhead Chapter 8 8 8 Display massage Code Condition detected Action Printhead error Open top cover and replace the right printhead 03800300 2801 Printhead DI compensation failure Replace printhead Printhead error Open top cover and replace the right printhead 03800400 2803 Printhead EEPROM error Replace printhead Ink tank is empty Press OK and replace ink tank 03810104 2500 BK ink tank empty Renew the BK ink tank Ink tank is empty Press OK and replace ink tank 03810101 2501 Y ink tank empty Renew the Y ink tank Ink tank is empty Press OK and replace ink tank 03810102 2502 M ink tank empty Renew the M ink tank Ink tank is empty Press OK and replace ink tank 03810103 2503 C ink tank empty Renew the C ink tank Ink tank is empty Press OK and rep
162. ers upper left upper right cover rear cover right left and left right ink tank cover units and then open the left right ink tanks Chapter 4 2 Remove two screws 1 on front side of the printer and three screws 2 on the rear side and then remove upper rear cover 3 a KL EE 11 B 1 AR II dE Note on installing the upper rear cover 1 Fit three rear panel screws 1 into screw holes on the right side TEN 22125 NG F 4 21 1 Upper cover Removing the upper cover 1 To remove the upper cover remove left right circle covers L left right circle covers S left right side covers upper left upper right covers rear cover left right right cover unit and upper rear cover 2 Remove upper cover 2 while opening left right arm stays 1 outward one by one gt F 4 22 m Release lever Removing the release lever 1 To remove release lever 1 remove the purge unit and then remove the release lever To do so keep pinch roller 2 pressurized to ease to work of phase align ment during gear installation Chapter 4 1 To install the release lever align the gear of the release lever with mark 3 phase in the receiving gear Reinstalling the release lever F 4 23 4 12 Chapter 4 4 3 5 Drive Unit a Feed motor Removing the feed motor 1 To remove feed motor 1 loosen
163. ervice Mode Menu Tree go to UGW PORT menu using key and Y key E RDS UGW PORT F 7 32 Press V key to enter the Setup Mode A cursor is displayed Enter a port number UGW PORT o o o o o F 7 33 Use and Y keys to select characters to enter Press Back key to cancel what you entered and go back to the previous screen Press OK key to determine what you entered and go back to the previous screen The actual setting value of UGW address UGW ADDRESS and UGW port UGW PORT are categorized as confidential information so they are not described in this manual 3 Communication Test COM TEST 1 In service mode referring to the Service Mode Menu Tree go to COM TEST menu using key and Y key COM TEST YES F 7 34 2 Press OK key to start the test is displayed at the start of the test COM TEST YES F 7 35 3 During the communication test CHECK NOW is displayed F 7 36 Once the communication test is started it cannot be cancelled Other operation won t be accepted until the result is obtained 7 31 Chapter 7 4 If the communication test was successful CHECK RSLT OK is displayed F 7 37 Press A key to exit this operation mode and go back to the top of COM TEST menu 5 If the communication test was failed CHECK RSLT NG is displayed F 7 38 Press key to exit this operation mode and go back to the top of COM TEST menu If you c
164. ery v Capping v Sensor system power OFF v Backup of various data Writing to EEPROM v Power off Chapter 2 2 2 3 Print Position Adjustment Function This printer supports a print position adjust the vertical and horizontal print position and the bidirectional print position of the printhead mounted on the carriage and the feedrate Print position adjustment work in two modes automatic adjustment in which print position adjustment patterns printed are detected by a multi sensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage and manual adjustment in which print position adjustment patterns that are slightly modified from one another are printed so that visually verified adjustment values can be set from the operation panel To make print position adjustment A3 or larger sized roll media or cut media are needed 2 2 4 Head Management This printer supports a nozzle check function to spot non discharging nozzles in the printhead When the printer detects a non discharging nozzle it starts cleaning the printhead automatically to correct its discharge failure If cleaning does not work the printer backs up the non discharging nozzle with an alternative nozzle automatically to ensure unfailing print performance Detection timings automatic Power on carriage cover open detection print start check timing variable by selecting Nozzle Check from the system menu 2 2 5 Printhead Overhea
165. es image data synthesized with mask data within the ASIC in sync with the discharge time while loading the data into SDRAM from time to time e The ASIC IC2 collects printhead information from EEPROM mounted on the printheads and the printer temperature from the latch IC on the carriage board and transmit them to the ASIC IC1 The ASIC IC1 also receives mask pattern data from the firmware installed in flash ROM f The ASIC IC1 converts the image data synthesized with the mask pattern to data associated with the printhead information and the printer temperature trans mitting the data to the printheads as a print signal It transmits heat pulses to the printheads at the same time to optimize head driving g The printheads convert the received print signal from a serial signal to a parallel signal for each row of nozzles and ANDs it with the heat pulses for perform printing h The ASIC IC1 controls the general aspects of image processing and print drive control by detecting the status of the individual printer components with refer ence to the adjustment values stored in EEPROM SDRAM is used as work memory i The ASIC IC2 controls the general aspects of drive control by controlling button actuations and message displays on the basis of the firmware installed in flash ROM 2 2 Chapter 2 2 1 3 Print Driving Print and control signals are transferred via the carriage board to the printheads to discharge inks from the nozzle assem
166. essing the Load and Navigate keys Start the printer in PCB replacement mode 4 Release the key but not before making sure that Initializing appears on the display The message lamp lights when printer enters PCB replacement mode 5 Wait until REPLACE MODE appears on the display 6 Select MC BOARD and press the OK key 7 Turn off the power but not before making sure that Power off appears on the display 8 Turn on the power 9 Check the firmware version If the firmware is not the latest version upgrade the firmware to the latest version b Replacing the main controller PCB 1 Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug 2 Replace the main controller PCB 3 Reconnect the power plug and turn on the power while pressing the Load and Navigate keys Start the printer in PCB replacement mode 4 Release the key but not before making sure that Initializing appears on the display The message lamp lights when printer enters PCB replacement mode 5 Wait until REPLACE MODE appears on the display 6 Select CPU BOARD and press the OK key 7 Turn off the power but not before making sure that Power off appears on the display 8 Turn on the power 9 Check the firmware version If the firmware is not the latest version upgrade the firmware to the latest version 4 27 Chapter 4 4 3 14 Opening the cap and moving the wiper unit This section explains how to uncap the carriage and ink supply v
167. etection hardware error 1 Replace the new printhead Hardware error 03130031 2F32 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F32 Multi sensor error Check the environment for interferences from outside light Replace the multi sensor unit Hardware error 03130031 2F3A Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F3A Valve motor error Check the ink supply unit Hardware error 03130031 2F3B Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F3B CS communication error Remove the ink tanks and then reload them Replace the ink tank Check the main controller PCB Hardware error 03130031 260E Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 260E Gap detection error Check the carriage unit and surrounding parts Replace the main controller PCB Hardware error 03130031 2618 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2618 VH voltage error Check the power supply unit Hardware error 03130031 260F Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 260F Gap reference surface error Replace the multi sensor reference Roll feed unit err Turn off printer and check roll feed unit 03060B00 2E24 Roll feed unit failure Replace the roll feed unit Unknown file Check file format Turn off printer wait a while then turn it on again 03900001 4049 ROM data for another model has been transf
168. ets equivalent to A4 sheets LIFE A F Cumulative number of printed media for environments A to F sheets POWER ON Cumulative power on time excluding the sleep time Hours W INK Remaining capacity of the maintenance cartridge CUTTER Number of cutting operations count as 1 by moving back and Times forth WIPE Number of wiping operations Times SLEEP ON Cumulative sleep on time Hours 2 CARRIAGE Counters related to carriage unit T 7 20 Display Description Unit PRINT Cumulative printing time Hours DRIVE Cumulative carriage moving time Hours CR COUNT Cumulative carriage scan count count as 1 by moving back and forth Times CR DIST Cumulative carriage scan distance count as 1 by moving 210mm Times PRINT COUNT Cumulative print end count count as 1 by capping Times 3 PURGE Counters related to purge unit T 7 21 Display Description Unit CLN A 1 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 1 normal suction operations Times CLN A 2 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 2 ink level adjusting operations Times CLN A 3 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 3 initial filling operations Times CLN A 6 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 6 strong normal suction operations Times CLN A 7 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 7 aging operations CLN A 10 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 10 ink filling after secondary transportation
169. ever and reload the paper 03010000 2017 Paper right edge detection error Check the right edge of paper Check the paper type Paper size not detected Lift the release lever and reload the paper 03010000 2018 Paper left edge detection error Check the left edge of paper Check the paper type Cannot adjust printhead Press Online to clear the error and readjust printhead 03863000 2820 Printhead registration unadjustable Check the paper on which a pattern is printed for smears Check the environment for interferences from outside light Clean the printhead Cannot adjust printhead Press Online to clear the error and readjust printhead 03863000 2821 LF unadjustable Check the paper on which a pattern is printed for smears Check the environment for interferences from outside light Clean the printhead Cannot print as specified Lift the release lever and replace paper with A4 LTR vertical or larger 03010000 2E1F Undersized paper loaded for internal printing A4 or larger Replace with A4 Letter or any larger sized paper Cannot print as specified Lift the release lever and replace paper with A3 Ledger vertical or larger 03010000 2E1F Undersized paper loaded for internal printing A3 or larger Replace with A3 11 x17 or any larger sized paper Cannot print as specified Lift the release lever and replace roll with 10 in wide o
170. four screws 2 and remove timing belt 3 and spring 4 2 Remove four loosened screws 2 to release feed motor 1 and remove the connector Reinstalling the feed motor To reassemble the feed roller drive timing belt 3 into position set the tension of timing belt 3 by adjusting the pressure of spring 4 Then fix feed motor 1 F 4 24 b Action to take after replacing the feed roller encoder and feed roller This printer as shipped has the feed roller eccentricity that is variations in the rate of paper feed from rotation to rotation corrected for enhanced media feed ac curacy When the feed roller HP sensor or feed roller encoder and feed roller pertaining to the correction of eccentricity variations has been replaced therefore they should require adjustment Execute service mode under the following conditions to launch automatic adjustment Service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt PRINT PATTERN gt LF TUNING Media type Glossy photo paper If adjustment cannot be done properly by selecting SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt PRINT PATTERN gt LF TUNING auto adjustment carry out manual ad justment Service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt PRINT PATTERN gt LF TUNING2 Media type Gloss photo paper Check the printed pattern and enter values for adjustment Chapter 4 4 3 6 Carriage Unit a Removing the carriage unit 1 Drain the ink See Disassembly Reassembly gt Points to Note on Disassembly
171. gain is about 30 250 Check 2 Check whether the multi sensor performance has degraded or whether the media is compatible When LED gain is maximum values and LED media output is 168 or less an error occurs Maximum value of LED gain 255 When the multi sensor performance and media are normal LED gain is about 5 100 9 NOZZLE CHECK Checks for non discharging nozzle with head management sensor 10 NOZZLE INF Displays the result of non discharging nozzle check performed with NOZZLE CHECK by nozzle row of each ink color Press the key key to switch the ink color AE A EVEN row AO A ODD row BE B EVEN row BO B ODD row F 7 16 11 MEMORY CHK T 7 18 Display Description DDR Checks the DDR SDRAM mounted on the Main Controller PCB EEP Checks the EEPROM Chapter 7 12 HEAD CNT CHK Confirms the contact status of the printhead e REPLACE 1 L amp R PRINTHEADS Replaces printheads L and R f COUNTER Displays the life operation frequency and time of each unit print counts for each media type and else The count values can be printed from PRINT INF 1 PRINTER Counters related to product life T 7 19 Display Description Unit LIFE TTL Cumulative number of printed media equivalent of A4 sheets LIFE ROLL Cumulative number of printed roll media equivalent of A4 sheets LIFE CUTSHEET Cumulative number of printed cut she
172. haracter at the cursor position is moved to the right and a new character is inserted You can select the enter mode with the Navi key The default setting is small alphabet letter 2 How to enter port number 00001 1 65535 qp L R AV UP DOWN OK Set F 7 25 Possible to set between 1 and 65535 The default display is 1 The top digit can be selected between 0 and 6 Other digits can be selected between 0 and 9 When OK key is pressed and the value is over 65535 it is fixed on 65535 When OK key is pressed and the value is 0 it is fixed on 1 7 28 Chapter 7 3 How to enter user name Proxy User User Name Canon gt AV Select lc Stop Delete Navi a A gt 1 OK Set F 7 26 1 Entry filed 24 one byte characters It is the same as the entering method of proxy server address 4 How to enter password lt AV Select Stop Delete Navi a gt A gt 1 OK Set F 7 27 1 Entry filed 24 one byte characters If a password has already been set when you press the or Y key at any cursor position all the will disappear and the first letter will be entered as the first character Entered characters are visible until you press OK key Once entering into the menu again they will be changed to Other information is the same as the entering method of proxy server address 3 2 e RDS settings 1 Enter the service mode Tu
173. he left printhead during capping and cleaning The part of the caps that comes into contact with the face plate of the nozzle assembly is made of rubber Two caps are in position to meet each of the printheads mounted on the carriage six trains of nozzles The caps are activated to protect the nozzle assembly on capping When the carriage moves to the home position the caps are elevated by the cap can that is driven by the capping motor capping the nozzle assembly to protect it These caps cap the nozzle assembly to suck inks from the printhead by means of the suction pump Wiper unit Glycerin tank Carriage lockpin Pump cam sensor Pump encoder F 2 15 b Wipers The wipers are driven by the purge motor to wipe the six trains of nozzles in the nozzle assembly in the printhead simultaneously A pair of wiper blades are in position to ensure wiping performance The wiping operation operates on a slide wiping basis sliding the wiper blades via wiper cams through the normal rotation normal of the purge motor Wiping is executed by the wiper blades moving at a constant speed to the front of the printer after the end of a print or suction operation A wiper blade set perpendicularly to the head wipes the entire face of the printhead followed by a narrower blade wiping the nozzle assembly The wiper blades are cleaned before they are replaced at the wiping position after wiping to preserve wiping performance Wiper blade cleaning is carried out by
174. he nozzles to the cap borderless ink jet tray an paper to remove bubbles in the nozzles and dust and other foreign particles c Ink supply function The suction pump of the purge unit operates together with the ink supply valve to supply ink to the printhead during the initial filling and ink level adjustment 2 16 Chapter 2 Details of the cleaning function are shown in the table below T 2 6 Name of Service mode Cleaning mode or PRINT INF Operation Description of cleaning Name of Main Menu Cleaning 1 CLN A 1 CLN M 1 Normal cleaning Removes dried ink from nozzles thick ink accumulated on the Head Cleaning A face and paper particles Cleaning 2 CLN A 2 Ink level adjustment and cleaning Adjust the ink level in the head by suction and then performs normal cleaning Cleaning 3 CLN A 3 Initial filling ink Fills the empty tube during initial installation with ink and then performs normal cleaning Cleaning 4 CLN M 4 Ink drainage for head replacement Drains ink to replace the head drains only the ink in the head Replace P head Cleaning 5 CLN M 5 Ink drainage for secondary transport Drains ink from the head and tube for secondary transport Move Printer Cleaning 6 CLN A 6 CLN M 6 Normal strong cleaning Performs suction stronger than when adjusting the ink filling Head Cleaning B amount in the head or normal cleaning to unclog nozzles Cleaning 7 CLN A 7 Aging Performs
175. hether the media is compatible with the multi sensor When the difference between Media edge diffuse reflection gain and Media edge diffuse reflection platen output is 100 or less an error occurs When the multi sensor and media are normal the difference is about 300 600 Check 3 Check the effect of external diffuse light 7 16 Chapter 7 When the difference between Media edge diffuse reflection external light output and Media edge diffuse reflection platen output is 500 or more the effect of diffuse light is judged as being great When the effect is normal the difference is about 50 300 Check 4 Check whether the media is compatible When the result of Media edge regular reflection gain is five times as large as the result of Media edge diffuse reflection gain the media is judged as being incompatible with the multi sensor If the media is compatible the result is about 0 5 to 1 5 times for plain glossy paper about 1 3 times for tracing paper Check 5 Check whether the media is compatible When the result of Media edge diffuse reflection gain is in one of the following the media may be incompatible with the multi sensor Nine or more times as large as that of plain paper Ten or more times as large as that of glossy paper Three or more times as large as that of tracing paper 2 Checking OUTPUT 0 when clear film is fed Check 1 Check whether the multi sensor performance has degr
176. hing or replacing the carriage or carriage belt When replacing the carriage motor or linear encoder sensor When there is excessive load on the carriage such as when jamming If the following error message appears when performing CR MOTOR COG check that carriage and carriage belt are installed properly and clean the rail shaft If the error still occurs replace the carriage motor Chapter 7 d FUNCTION 1 CR UNLOCK Unlocks the carriage When CR UNLOCK is performed the carriage lock pin is lowered and the carriage can be moved 2 CR LOCK Locks the carriage When CR LOCK is performed the carriage lock pin is raised and the carriage is locked 3 PG CHECK Initializes the purge unit 4 CR AUTO SCAN The carriage scans When CR AUTO SCAN is performed the carriage scans with the count width and speed set with CR SCAN COUNT CR SCAN SIZE CR SCAN SPEED 5 CR SCAN COUNT Sets the number of scans 1 to 30 to be performed with CR AUTO SCAN Default 1 6 CR SCAN SIZE Sets the scan width to be performed with CR AUTO SCAN 1 A4 2 17inch 3 24inch 4 36inch 5 44inch Default 5 7 CR SCAN SPEED Sets the speed of the scan to be performed with CR AUTO SCAN 1 12 5 2 25 0 3 33 3 4 40 0 Unit inch sec Default I MEMO The settings set with CR SCAN COUNT CR SCAN SIZE CR SCAN SPEED are reset to default when the power is reset 8 OPT SENS OUTPUT Displays the values analog value multi sensor detected
177. horter Compliant with ANSI EIA TIA 568A or ANSVEIA TIA 568B 4 Interface connector Printer side Compliant with IEEE802 3 ANSI X3 263 ISO IEC60603 7 5 Protocol IPX SPX Netware4 2 J 5 1 J 6 0 J SNMP TCP IP AppleTalk HTTP 1 9 Chapter 1 1 5 Names and Functions of Components 1 5 1 Front 2 F 1 16 1 Top Cover Open this cover to install the Printhead load paper and remove any jammed paper from inside the printer as needed 2 Ink Tank Cover Open this cover to replace an Ink Tank 3 Ejection Slot All printed matter is ejected from this port 4 Ejection Guide Guides printed documents as they are ejected Open this guide when loading a roll 5 Output Stacker A cloth tray that catches ejected documents 6 Roll Holder Slot Slide the Roll Holder into this slot 7 Holder Stopper Secure the roll on the Roll Holder with this part 8 Roll Holder Load the roll on this holder 9 Paper Feed Slot When loading a roll insert the edge of the roll paper here 10 Ejection Support Prevents printed documents from winding around the Roll Holder or Paper Feed Slot 11 Release Lever Releases the Paper Retainer Lift this lever toward the front of the printer when loading paper 12 Stand A stand that holds the printer Equipped with casters to facilitate moving the printer 13 Maintenance Cartridge Cover Open this cover to replace the Maintenance Cartridge 14 Maintenance Cartridge Ink used fo
178. i 8 1 AMA AS 8 1 822 Warning Table iio id inian nanus hu 8 2 SN RR es 8 2 8 J Error RE 8 5 83 1 EE 8 5 8 4 8evice Call Fable asian aaa aaa RR 8 15 8 41 Service Call e 8 15 Chapter 8 8 1 Outline 8 1 1 Outline The printer indicates errors using the display and LEDs If an error occurs during printing the printer status is also displayed on the status monitor of the printer driver The following three types of errors are displayed on the display Warning Status where the print operation can be continued without remedying the cause of the problem This can however adversely affect the printing results Error Status where the print operation is stopped and the regular operation cannot be recovered until the cause of the problem is remedied Service call error When a service call error occurs the error is not cleared and the error indication remains on the operation panel even if the printer is powered off and on again Occurrence of the service call error is indicated again at power on This measure is taken to prevent user s recovery of the service call error and damages to the printer Service call errors can be cleared however by starting up the printer in the service mode Note that some of the warnings errors and service call error described in the following tables may not appear in this printer In addition the message appears on the screen may not be the same as what is described in the table
179. iage is caused to reciprocate level on the platen by means of the carriage belt that is driven by the power imparted from the carriage motor d Printhead maintenance function This printer performs cleaning operations such as wiping the printhead and sucking inks with the carriage halted at its home position e Nozzle check function This printer carries out an ink discharge operation with the carriage halted at the head management sensor locating a non discharging nozzle in the printhead f Carriage height adjustment function Tf the separation between the face of the printhead and the paper carriage height is varied as a result of differing paper thicknesses cockled or curled paper or other problems the printer is liable to mist generation as the carriage height increases or to head rubbing as the carriage height decreases To maintain an acceptable carriage height the lift motor is driven according to the selected paper type feeding method print conditions borderless printing prior itized picture quality environmental condition temperature humidity and multi sensor measurements to automatically adjust the separation between the face of the printhead and the paper The table below shows the relation between the form kind and the height of the head T 2 3 Height of printhead Media type reference Remarks mm 1 2 Plain paper 1 4 Photopaper Synthetic paper Film Plain paper Line drawing Capping position 1 8
180. ic cleaning 1 normal Unit times suction operations 2 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 2 ink level adjusting operations 3 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 3 initial filling operations 6 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 6 strong normal suction operations 7 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 7 aging Operations 8 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 8 flashing Operations 10 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 10 ink filling after secondary transportation operations 11 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 11 ink filling after head replacement operations 15 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 15 dot count small suction operations 16 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 16 sedimented ink agitation operations 17 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 17 small suction operations TTL Total number of automatic cleaning operations CLN M Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 operations 1 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 normal Unit times suction operations 4 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 4 ink draining from head after head replacement operations 5 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 5 ink draining from head and tube before transportation Operations 6 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 6 normal strong suction operations TTL Total number of manual cleaning operations CLEAR INK CONSUME Cumulative count of ink section consumption amount Unit times clearing MT
181. icity correction Feed roller encoder sensor The feed roller encoder sensor is driven to detect the length of paper feeding for each rotation of the feed roller from encoder slits 2 37 Chapter 2 2 5 5 Media take up Unit Media take up on off sensor Media take up paper detection sensor F 2 39 Media take up on off sensor The photointerrupter based media take up on off sensor detects the switch status of the media take up unit When the media take up switch is set to ON the sensor arm transmits the sensor light power on the media take up unit When the media take up switch is set to OFF the sensor arm shields the sensor light shutting down the media take up unit Media take up paper detection sensor When the sensor light is shielded by a loop of printed paper the media take up motor rotates to take up the paper 2 5 6 Others Humidity sensor F 2 40 Humidity sensor The humidity sensor detects the temperature and relative humidity around the printer to implement head height adjustment maintenance jet control waste ink evap oration calculation and suction fan control on the basis of the temperature and relative humidity thus measured 2 38 Chapter 3 INSTALLATION Contents Contents 3 1 Transporting the Printer RO ernannt 3 1 ci AA E NN 3 1 3 1 1 1 Transporting the Printer ui a 3 1 3 1 2 Reinstalling the Printer 3 1 2 1 Reinstalling the Printer Chapter 3 3 1 Transport
182. idle ejection after replacement of the head Cleaning 10 CLN A 10 Ink filling after secondary transport Fills the empty tube during installation after secondary Move Printer transport with ink and performs normal cleaning Cleaning 11 CLN A 11 Ink filling after head replacement Performs normal cleaning after head replacement and ink filling Cleaning 15 CLN A 15 Dot count suction Performs suction to remove ink adhered to dried nozzles and thick ink accumulated on the face when the dot count reaches the prescribed value Cleaning 16 CLN A 16 Precipitated ink agitation Performs the agitation ink supply valve open close operation to prevent the ink ingredient from precipitating Cleaning 17 CLN A 17 Cleaning weak Performs cleaning weaker than normal cleaning to unclog nozzles Chapter 2 Cleaning operation timings are as follows 2 18 Printer status Cleaning operation Ee Standby 168 hours elapsed capped Cleaning 1 Normal lg Cleaning At least 720 to 960 hours elapsed since the last session of Cleaning 2 3 6 or 10 480 hours after Cleaning 6 Normal Sg initial installation strong Cleaning At initial installation and 96 hours elapsed since the last session of Cleaning 16 Cleaning 16 Precipitated ink agitation 1 hour elapsed capped with a specified number of dots discharged per chip completed after last Wiping Id
183. igh quality Select Print Quality to reduce horizontal streaks Select Print Length to accurately control the feed amount However selecting Print Length may cause colors to become slightly uneven in the carriage scan direction Adj Quality Auto Genuin ePpr Set when using paper described in the paper reference guide A pattern to adjust the paper feed amount is printed and the feed amount is automatically adjusted from the printed result Auto OtherPa per Set when using paper not described in the paper reference guide A pattern to adjust the paper feed amount is printed and the feed amount is automatically adjusted from the printed result This takes longer than Auto GenuinePpr to print and consumes more ink Manual Select for paper that cannot be adjusted by Auto GenuinePpr or Auto OtherPaper such as highly transparent paper Print a pattern to adjust the paper feed amount according to the type of paper Adjust Length AdjustmentPr int A High B Standard Draft Print a test pattern for adjustment relative to paper stretching or shrinkage after which you can enter the amount of adjustment Change Settings A High B Standard Draft Displayed when Print Length is selected as Adj Priority for Feed Priority Adjust the expansion rate of the currently loaded paper Enter the result adjusted with AdjustmentPrint or the difference with your own mea
184. ignal 1 A 27 GND GND 28 HI A HE 1 OUT Head L heat enable signal 1 A 29 GND GND 6 17 Chapter 6 6 18 J703 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 30 H1 B DATA 2 EV OUT Even head L data signal 2 B 31 GND GND 32 IO ASIC SDA IN OUT Head ROM control signal data 33 GND GND 34 IO ASIC SCL OUT Head ROM control signal clock 35 GND GND 36 HI LT OUT Head L latch signal 37 GND GND 38 HI OUT Head L clock signal 39 GND GND 40 HI DSOUTI IN Head L temperature output signal 1 41 GND GND 42 H1 DSOUT2 IN Head L temperature output signal 2 43 GND GND 44 H1 DLD_LICC2 OUT Head L analogue switch latch signal 45 GND GND 46 HI DATA LICC2 OUT Head L analogue switch data signal 47 GND GND 48 HI DASLK LICC2 OUT Head L analogue switch clock signal 49 GND GND 50 H DASH_LICC2 OUT Head analogue switch A D trigger signal T 6 34 J801 Pin Number Signal name INOUT Function 1 GND GND 2 GND GND 3 VH3_FB IN VH3 feed back voltage 4 VH3 OUT Power supply 5 VH3 OUT Power supply 6 VH3 OUT Power supply 7 VH3 OUT Power supply 8 VH3 OUT Power supply 9 VH3 OUT Power supply 10 GND GND 11 GND GND 12 GND GND 13 GND GND 14 GND GND 15 GND
185. information about the carriage driving time arises in the carriage unit After replacing the carriage unit select INITIALIZE gt CARRIAGE in the service mode to initialize the information about the carriage driving time 3 After replacing the purge unit The information about the number of cleanings arises in the purge unit After replacing the purge unit select INITIALIZE gt PURGE in the service mode to initialize clear the information about the number of cleanings 4 On replacement of supplies After supplies have been replaced execute INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS xx in service mode to initialize clear the parts counter information For the consumable parts see Maintenance gt Consumable Parts A You cannot check the counter information once it is initialized cleared Be careful not to initialize the counter information before checking it You cannot modify the counter information from the operation panel 1 7 3 2 Confirming the Firmware Version Firmware has been downloaded to the main controller When you have replaced the main controller check that the firmware is the latest version If not update it to the latest version Reference For how to up update the main controller refer to TROUBLESHOOTING gt Update 1 7 3 3 Precautions against Static Electricity Certain clothing may generate static electricity causing an electrical charge to build up on your body Such a charge can
186. ing T 7 42 No Question Answer Ql Registration information of the device E RDS is once When registration of the device e RDS is deleted from the deleted from the UGW server and is re registered after that UGW the status will be changed to the communication test If a communication test is not not completed because related carried out then device information on UGW becomes information has lost from a database Therefore device invalid information will also become invalid if that condition persists for seven days without carrying out the communication test Hence to avoid the invalid condition carry out the communication test Q2 The communication test with the UGW server results NG The comunication test might become NG in the following cases 1 Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name or DNS server has been halted 2 Network cable is blocked off Network cable is broken 3 Proxy server settings are not correct Q3 Could you describe the timing of data transmitting from the The schedule of data transmitting and the start time are device e RDS to the UGW and what data size is sent to the determined by settings in the UGW side The timing is once UGW per 16 hours by default and counter data size is maximum 1400 bytes Q4 Can I turn the device power off during the device e RDS While operating the device e RDS the power of the printer operation and network equipmen
187. ing outside light 19 LED blue gain 20 21 Media edge diffuse reflection media output including outside light 22 Media edge diffuse reflection outside light output when LED is OFF 23 Media edge diffuse reflection platen output excluding outside light 24 Media edge diffuse reflection gain 25 26 Media edge regular reflection media output including outside light 27 Media edge regular reflection outside light output when LED is OFF 28 Media edge regular reflection platen output excluding outside light 29 Media edge regular reflection gain 30 MEMO Display is all if GAP CALIB is not performed If the value exceeds 1000 999 is displayed 1 Checking OUTPUT 0 and OUTPUT 1 when media excluding clear film is fed Check 1 Check whether the multi sensor performance has degraded or whether the media is compatible with the multi sensor When Media edge diffuse reflection gain is maximum values and Media edge diffuse reflection media output is 186 or less an error occurs Maximum value of Media edge diffuse reflection gain 255 When the multi sensor and media are normal the following values are displayed T 7 16 Media edge diffuse reflection Media edge diffuse reflection gain media output Plain paper About 10 35 About 500 600 Glossy paper About 8 25 Tracing paper About 30 100 Check 2 Check whether the multi sensor performance has degraded or w
188. ing the Printer 3 1 1 Transporting the Printer 3 1 1 1 Transporting the Printer A When transporting the printer the printhead must be capped and stay in the carriage In spite of this precaution shocks incurred during transportation can damage the printhead Print the nozzle check pattern before making preparations for transporting the printer pint the nozzle check pattern again after installing the printer at the new lo cation and then compare the two printouts If any problem such as nozzle clogging cannot be resolved by printhead cleaning replace the printhead with a new one This section describes how to transport the printer The procedure depends on the mode of transportation Select the appropriate transportation level from the following transportation modes 1 Transportation mode Moving the printer on the same floor with no difference in grade without tilting the printer LEVEL 0 Moving the printer on floor where there is difference in grade or by truck by tilting the printer LEVEL 1 Moving the printer by plane or ship tilting direction of printer is unpredictable LEVEL 2 Moving the printer in low temperature environment such as sub zero LEVEL 2 Moving the printer on its end LEVEL 3 A When lifting or moving the printer be sure to hold the handle at bottom left and right of the printer Holding the printer by its cover can deform the cover Chapter 3 The printer main unit weigh
189. int The memory is full Verify the transmitted data before reprinting GL2 W0904 01340904 1048 Overflow of Polygon buffer HP GL 2 Check if there is the non image area of the print The memory is full Verify the transmitted data before reprinting GL2 W0903 01340903 1047 Overflow of replot buffer HP GL 2 Check if there is the non image area of the print The memory is full Verify the transmitted data before reprinting GL2 W0502 01340502 1041 Invalid parameter HP GL 2 Verify the transmitted data before reprinting The parameter is out of range GL2 W0504 01340504 1043 Invalid command HP GL 2 Verify the transmitted data before reprinting This command is not supported Mail box nearly full 011A1001 2901 The free hard disk space left for Personal Boxes in the Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes Delete unwanted data printer s hard disk does not have more than 1 GB combined Mail box full 01861003 2902 100 jobs are stored in the Personal Box Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxs Now printing without saving data Before borderless printing 01861004 1049 The platen shutter is closed at the borderless printing Open the corresponding platen shutter move the blue platen switch Blue platen switch is dirty 01861004 1050 Platen shutter cleaning warning Clean the platen shutter Please clean the switch Not much ink is left Prepare 01810103 1003 C ink tank near empty Renew the C ink tank to replace the ink Not much ink
190. ion Sheet printing is selected Press Load Eject and load sheets 03860002 2E02 Data with a cut sheet specification has been received but no cut sheets are loaded Load cut sheets at the paper tray port Roll printing is selected but sheets are loaded Press OK remove the sheets and load a roll 03860002 2E0A Data with a roll media specification has been received when a cut sheet tray is loaded Replace with roll media Roll printing is selected Press Load Eject and load a roll 03060A00 2E00 Data with a roll media specification has been received but no roll media are loaded Load roll media No Roll Feed Unit Turn printer off and install roll feed unit 03060A00 2E0E Roll media unit not installed Install the roll media unit The roll is empty Lift the release lever and replace the roll 03060A00 2E1B Roll media end Renew the supply of roll media Wrong paper type 03061000 2E15 Paper type mismatch Check the type of paper that can be fed and reload the paper This type of paper is not 03061000 2E15 Non support media of HP GL 2 Exchange for the compatible paper to HP GL 2 compatible with HP GL 2 Online Print Stop Stop Printing Load Eject Change Paper before reprinting Manual printing is selected but a roll is loaded Press Load Eject and remove the roll 03860001 2E0C Data with a cut sheet specification has been received when ro
191. is variations in the rate of paper feed from rotation to rotation corrected for enhanced media feed ac curacy When the feed roller HP sensor or feed roller encoder and feed roller pertaining to the correction of eccentricity variations has been replaced therefore they should require adjustment Execute service mode under the following conditions to launch automatic adjustment Service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt PRINT PATTERN gt LF TUNING Media type Glossy photo paper If adjustment cannot be done properly by selecting SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt PRINT PATTERN gt LF TUNING auto adjustment carry out manual ad justment Service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt PRINT PATTERN gt LF TUNING2 Media type Gloss photo paper Check the printed pattern and enter values for adjustment 4 20 Chapter 4 4 3 9 Purge Unit a Removing the purge unit 1 Turn off the power and move the carriage to above the platen If the carriage is locked at its home position insert a Phillips screwdriver from the right side into hole 1 in the shaft of the lift unit in the purge unit and turn it counterclockwise This will lower cap 2 and lock pin 3 allowing the carriage to be moved 2 3 1 F 4 39 1 Chapter 4 4 3 10 Ink Tank Unit a Removing ink tank units 1 Drain the ink See Disassembly Reassembly gt Points to Note on Disassembly Reassembly gt Draining the ink 2 Detach the joint bet
192. is drained for transport 4 Conductivity of Ink The ink used in this printer is electrically conductive If ink leaks to into the mechanical unit wipe clean with a soft well wrung damp cloth If ink leaks onto electrical units wipe them completely using tissue paper If you cannot remove ink completely replace the electrical units with new ones A If electrical units are powered with ink leaked onto them the units may damage Never connect the power cord when ink has leaded onto the electrical units 1 42 Chapter 1 1 7 2 2 Ink Tank 1 Unpacking the Ink Tank Do not unpack the ink tank until you are ready to install it When installing the ink tank be sure to shake 1t slowly 7 to 8 times before unpacking it Otherwise the ink ingredients may precipitate and degrade the print quality To prevent foreign matter from entering the ink port installed the unpacked ink tank in the printer immediately 2 Handling the Ink Tank To prevent foreign matter from entering the ink flow path and causing ink suction and printing problems never touch the ink port and contacts of the ink tank When you press down the ink tank cover the needle enters the ink port allowing ink to flow between the printer and ink tank Do not raise or lower the ink tank cover except when replacing the ink tank F 1 41 1 43 Chapter 1 1 7 2 3 Handling the Printer 1 Precautions against Static Electricity Certain clothing may genera
193. is implemented on the basis of the readings Ink mist adhering to the sensor could deliver incorrect measurement readings when color calibration is executed If the ink dot count exceeds a tolerance the service error E194 4034 would occur If it does execute service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt GAP CALIB after the multisensor has been replaced to clear the dot count 2 35 Chapter 2 LED blue LED green LED red Infrared sensor d Infrared LED QS Media Y Platen F 2 37 A Service mode After SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt GAP CALIB has been carried out pass paper to make sure that it is detected properly In executing Calibration concurrently with the main menu choice Auto Head Adj or Manual Head Adj Auto Head Adj or Manual Head Adj first for the sake of higher color calibration accuracy 2 36 Chapter 2 2 5 4 Paper path system Feed roller HP sensor Feed roller Media sensor encoder F 2 38 Media sensor The photoreflector based media sensor detects the presence or absence of paper on the platen The sensor detects the presence of paper when it receives sensor light reflected upon the paper Feed roller HP sensor The feed roller HP sensor detects transitions from white transmitted or a reference to black shielded when the printer is switched on thereby setting the home position of feed roller eccentr
194. ity of light reflected upon the white plate Service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt GAP CALIB h Rail cleaner The shaft cleaner located in the right rear of the carriage helps keep the main rail clean i Internal unit temperature sensor One thermistor is installed on the head relay PCB on the back of the head holder to detect the internal unit temperature 1 Carriage relay PCB 7 Shaft cleaner 2 Multi sensor 8 Maintenance jet tray 3 Head relay PCB 9 Carriage HP sensor 4 Lift cam sensor 10 Multisensor reference 5 Sensor flag 11 Head management sensor unit 6 Lift cam 12 Lift motor 2 14 Chapter 2 2 3 2 4 Printhead 2 3 2 4 1 Structure of Printhead Each printhead is an integrated assembly of six trains of nozzles Capable of controlling each nozzle individually each printhead implements discharge control for six colors by itself a Nozzle arrangement The nozzle assembly is formed of 1 280 nozzles arranged at 600 dpi intervals in a zigzag pattern offering a total of 2 560 nozzles 1 200 dpi intervals SCH 053 _5 600inch 1 1200inch ENE O53 053 1 1 1 1 1 12556 12556 2556 6 25565 25565 2558002557 kees a 002527 base 002559 002559 002559 002559 032559 82 600inch F 2 13 b Nozzle assembly structure Inks supplied from the ink tanks are filtered through a mesh ink filter before being sent to the nozzle assembly Each nozzle t
195. k remaining detection function or detection replace the ink tank 03810113 2515 Unidentified status of PC ink tank refill ink tank Invalidate the ink remaining detection function or detection replace the ink tank 03810105 2518 Unidentified status of GY ink tank refill ink tank Invalidate the ink remaining detection function or detection replace the ink tank 03810115 2519 Unidentified status of ink tank refill ink tank Invalidate the ink remaining detection function or detection replace the ink tank 03810107 251A Unidentified status of R ink tank refill ink tank Invalidate the ink remaining detection function or detection replace the ink tank 03810109 251B Unidentified status of B ink tank refill ink tank Invalidate the ink remaining detection function or detection replace the ink tank 03810108 251C Unidentified status of G ink tank refill ink tank Invalidate the ink remaining detection function or detection replace the ink tank 03830103 25AA C ink tank detachment when using the refill ink tank Install the deetached ink tank 03830102 25AB M ink tank detachment when using the refill ink tank Install the deetached ink tank 03830101 25AC Y ink tank detachment when using the refill ink tank Install the deetached ink tank 03830106 25B0 MBK ink tank detachment when using the refill ink tank Install the deetached ink tank 03830106 25B1 MBK2 ink tank detach
196. k type Printhead and separate ink tanks Printhead PF 05 Structure Integrated six color assembly Number of nozzles 2 560 for each color Ink tank PFI 304 BK MBK C M Y PC PM GY PGY R G B PFI 704 BK MBK C M Y PC PM GY PGY R G B Ink type Pigment ink Ink tank capacity PFI 304 330 ml PFI 704 700 ml Detection functions Cover system Cover open closed detection Yes Left and right ink tank cover open closed detection Yes Detection functions Ink passage system Ink tank presence absence detection Yes Remaining ink level detection Yes Maintenance cartridge presence absence detection Yes Used ink tank full detection Yes Chapter 1 Detection functions Carriage system Printhead presence absence detection Yes Carriage position detection Yes Carriage home position detection Yes Carriage cover open closed detection Yes Carriage temperature detection Yes Printhead height detection Yes Non discharging nozzle detection Yes Non discharging nozzle backup feature Yes Detection functions Paper path system Paper presence absence detection Yes Paper width detection Yes Skew detection Yes Paper release lever position detection Yes Remaining roll media detection Yes Feed roller rotation detection Yes Operating noise Operating Approx 50dB A or less Standby Approx 35dB A or less Operating environment Temperature 15 to 35 degrees centigrade Humidity 10 to 90 R
197. lace ink tank 03810106 2506 MBK ink tank empty Renew the MBK ink tank Ink tank is empty Press OK and replace ink tank 03810106 2507 MBK2 ink tank empty Renew the MBK ink tank Ink tank is empty Press OK and replace ink tank 03810112 2504 PM ink tank empty Renew the PM ink tank Ink tank is empty 03810113 2505 PC ink tank empty Renew the PC ink tank Press OK and replace ink tank Ink tank is empty 03810105 2508 GY ink tank empty Renew the GY ink tank Press OK and replace ink tank Ink tank is empty Press OK and replace ink tank 03810115 2509 PGY ink tank empty Renew the PGY ink tank Ink tank is empty Press OK and replace ink tank 03810107 250A R ink tank empty Renew the R ink tank Ink tank is empty Press OK and replace ink tank 03810109 250B B ink tank empty Renew the B ink tank Ink tank is empty Press OK and replace ink tank 03810108 250C G ink tank empty Renew the G ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810204 2580 Low on the BK ink tank as during cleaning Replace with a fully replenis ed BK ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810201 2581 Low on the Y ink tank as during cleaning Replace with a fully replenis ed Y ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810202 2582 Low on the M ink tank as during cleaning
198. le ejection 0 0138 wiping Power on At initial installation Cleaning 3 initial filling 40g ink Both heads and inks The print operation has completed 168 to 720 hours elapsed capped Cleaning 1 Normal lg available Cleaning At least 720 to 960 hours elapsed Cleaning 6 Normal 5g since the last session of Cleaning 2 strong Cleaning 3 6 or 10 360 to 480 hours after initial installation At least 960 to 2160 hours elapsed Cleaning 2 Ink level 10g since the last session of Cleaning 2 adjustment and 3 6 or 10 480 hours after initial cleaning installation At least 96 hours elapsed since the Cleaning 16 last session of Cleaning 16 Precipitated ink agitation At least I hour elapsed capped with Wiping Idle ejection 0 013g a specified number of dots discharged per chip completed after last wiping Print operation aborted uncapped Up to 72 hours elapsed after an Cleaning 1 Normal lg and CR error occurring abort Cleaning Over 72 hours elapsed after an abort Cleaning 6 Normal 5g strong Cleaning Print operation aborted uncapped and no CR error occurring Cleaning I I ink filling 10g after head replacement No heads are available Cleaning 10 ink filling 40g on secondary transport Power off Specified number of dots discharged per chip completed since the last session of wiping Wiping Idle ejection 0 013g Before the Less than 168 hours elapsed capped Idle ejection 0 013g start of At least 168 hours elapse
199. les 1 7 1 3 Product Specifications n ater ee ae er 1 8 1321 Product Specifications at 1 8 1 4 Detailed eet ITT 1 9 1 4 1 Interface Specifications ecce en den ke ene deel a eee 1 9 1 5 Names and Functions of Components nn 1 10 1 5 15 Lii eie e et esce n et NR 1 10 15 2 2011 10 11 ee ERE SEK ke III AMI 1 11 1 5 3 Top Cover Ee EE 1 12 54 Garage areae RAO RUD RR RUE o e D PERPE sah aysa 1 13 1 5 5 Ink Tank Gover Inside tetto e cte ede te ias 1 13 EE el le TEE 1 14 1 6 1 A A e db ete did ia et donde 1 14 RADI EE 1 15 1 63 Men ets E eat Ee eeh E 1 16 1 64 Basket eu AA co RE dead len a cae 1 32 1 7 Safety and Precautions A a 1 38 17 1 Safety TEE 1 38 1 7 1 1 Moving e 1 38 1 7 1 2 Adhesion ofInk iii OEA ain eee 1 39 Electro ae re dle He 1 41 17 2 Other Precautions caia dla 1 42 12 Md lalo WEE 1 42 RT u n a a 1 43 1 7 2 3 Handling the Printer onere rere eterne ene ere eed en rr ndo d b Ee nl ei D n De e d Ee E a Deus 1 44 1 7 3 Precautions When Servicing Printer 1 1 46 1 7 3 1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer uiis tpe t db eei tete dp de d n 1 46 1 7 3 2 Confirming the Firmware Version
200. ll media are loaded Load cut sheets at the paper tray port Hardware error 03130031 2E23 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2E23 Cutter unit failure Check the cutter unit and sensor Hardware error 03130031 2E14 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F14 Writing to the ASIC register disabled Replace the main controller PCB Hardware error 03130031 2E16 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F16 Mist fan rotation error Check the mist fan Hardware error 03130031 2E17 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F17 Platen suction fan lock detection error Check the platen suction fan Hardware error 03130031 2E20 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F20 Purge motor cam position error Check the purge unit Hardware error 03130031 2E22 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F22 Pump move timeout Check the purge unit Hardware error 03130031 2E23 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F23 Purge motor error Pump inoperable Check the purge unit Hardware error 03130031 2E25 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F25 Unable to detect the carriage motor home position Check the carriage unit Check the linear encoder for smears Hardware error 03130031 2E26 Turn off printer wait then t
201. ly gt Adjustment and Setup Items gt Procedure after replacing the feed roller and reed roller encoder The media type is gloss photo paper 2 HEAD ADJ Set or initialize the registration adjustment values of each printheads T 7 14 Display Description MANUAL HEAD ADJ EXTENSION mode After printing the mode will change to Prints the detail patterns for the manual head adjustment at CR SCAN SPEED 2 25inch sec high printing ADJ SETTING Check the printed patterns and input the set values Try adjustment in this mode if vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment when the printer driver option High Precision Printing or Priority on dot placement accuracy is selected DETAIL Prints the detail patterns for the manual head adjustment at CR SCAN SPEED 3 and 4 33 3 40inch sec After printing the mode will change to ADJ SETTING Check the printed patterns and input the set values Try adjustment in this mode if BASIC does not improve printing BASIC Prints the basic patterns for the manual head adjustment at CR SCAN SPEED 1 to 4 12 5 to 40inch sec After printing the mode will change to ADJ SETTING Check the printed patterns and input the set values ADJ SETTING AtoF A 1 to F 2 This mode is to input the registration adjustment values It is possible to return the values to the former one by printing the status print before changing the value SAVE SE
202. ment when using the refill ink tank Install the deetached ink tank 03830104 25A9 BK ink tank detachment when using the refill ink tank Install the deetached ink tank Chapter 8 Display massage Code Condition detected Action Cannot detect ink level correctly Close tank cover 03810103 259D Subtank empty of C ink tank ink tank cover opening and refill ink tank usage After the ink tank cover replace the ink tank Cannot detect ink level correctly Close tank cover 03810102 259E Subtank empty of M ink tank ink tank cover opening and refill ink tank usage After the ink tank cover replace the ink tank Cannot detect ink level correctly Close tank cover 03810101 259F Subtank empty of Y ink tank ink tank cover opening and refill ink tank usage After the ink tank cover replace the ink tank Cannot detect ink level correctly Close tank cover 03810106 25A2 Subtank empty of MBK ink tank ink tank cover opening and refill ink tank usage After the ink tank cover replace the ink tank Cannot detect ink level correctly Close tank cover 03810106 25A3 Subtank empty of MBK2 ink tank ink tank cover opening and refill ink tank usage After the ink tank cover replace the ink tank Cannot detect ink level correctly Close tank cover 03810104 259C Subtank empty of BK ink tank ink tank cover opening
203. ml Cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement N INK EXC TTL Total amount of cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement ml 10 MEDIA x x 1 to 7 Counters related to media One to seven media types are displayed individually in order with large cumulative print area T 7 28 Display Description Unit NAME Media type TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet metric Sq m TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet inch Sq f ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media metric Sq m ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media inch Sq f CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet metric Sq m CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet inch Sq f 11 MEDIA OTHER Counters related to media Displays the total amount of cumulative print area of the other media type than the above mentioned T 7 29 Display Description Unit NAME Media type TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet metric Sq m TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet inch Sq f ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media metric Sq m ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media inch Sq f CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet metric Sq m CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet inch Sq f 12 MEDIASIZEI ROLL Counters related to roll
204. mm 44 Length 203mm 8 to 1600mm 63 Printable area Roll media Internal area excluding a 5 mm top bottom and left and right margins The printable area may vary with each type of paper media used Printable area Cut sheet Internal area excluding a 5 mm top margin a 23 mm bottom margin and 5 mm left and right margins The printable area may vary with each type of paper media used Printing recommendation area Roll media Internal area excluding a 20 mm top margin a 5 mm bottom margin and 5 mm left and right margins Printing recommendation area Cut sheet Internal area excluding a 20 mm top margin a 23 mm bottom margin and 5 mm left and right margins Borderless printing Roll media only width 254mm 10 355 6mm 14 431 8mm 17 515mm B2 B3 594mm A1 A2 609 6mm 24 841mm A0 Al 914 4mm 36 1030mm B0 B1 1066 8mm 42 1117 6mm 44 Memory 384MB Increase of memory none Hard disk drive 80GB 2 5inch 5400rpm S ATA I F Firmware Flash ROM update from USB or Ethernet Printer description language GARO Graphic Arts language with Raster Operation Emulation None Interface USB 2 0 Hi speed Network 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T Operation panel LCD 160 X 128 dots 13 keys 5 LEDs Panel language English Message language English German French Italian Spanish Chinese Korean Russianand and Japanese Printhead Ink Tan
205. n 1 6 Opera on Panel AA de o E ttg ele e re LER TRE 1 6 2 Displ y ret 1 6 3 Menu 1 6 4B sket E OR RR ROO 1 7 Safety and Precautions hu e Pi qp e ttti etes tita See dae is 1 7 1 Safety Precautions s DEFT Moving Parts pop RR UR RE PERDERE D e Ne e eb D PET 1 38 TIA A EE 1 39 TIE MPAA EE 1 41 17 2 Other ee 1 42 1 7 2 1 Printhead RE 1 42 Ipae qe 1 43 1 7 2 3 Handling the Printer izu aar ASEE TE VESSO SOOTS EREKET SEESE ARESA IOUEE EPERE S TEVOET IELO rE ITERA SATER TRS 1 44 1 7 3 Precautions When Servicing PMET siot ree deta 1 46 1 7 3 1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printe l l n aa ARAT AEEA EAE NOR TEE 1 46 1 7 3 2 Confirming the Firmware ONO 1 46 1 7 3 3 Precautions against Static Ed at eae en 1 46 1 7 3 4 Precautions for Disassembly R assemblyz u ad 1 46 1 7 3 5 Self diagnostie san RR HIER REN MR EINST e T t E E tees Mann 1 46 1 7 3 6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery uu erre vete side 1 46 Chapter 1 1 1 Product Overview 1 1 1 Product Overview This printer is a large format printer that prints in a maximum width of 44 inches with high speed photographic picture quality This printer is a stand mounted type printer and is capable of output to either roll media or cut sheet 2
206. nal name IN OUT Function 26 HO_CLK_B OUT Head R clock signal 27 GND GND 28 HO_LT_B OUT Head R latch signal 29 GND GND 30 H0 C DATA 5 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 5 C 31 GND GND 32 LIFT_CAM_IN IN Lift cam sensor output signal 33 GND GND 34 H0 B HE 3 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 3 B 35 GND GND 36 H0 C DATA 4 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 4 C 37 GND GND 38 H0 B DATA 3 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 3 B 39 GND GND 40 H0 B DATA 2 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 2 B 41 GND GND 42 H0 A DATA I EV B OUT Even head R data signal 1 A 43 GND GND 44 H0 A HE 1 B OUT Head R heat enable signal 1 A 45 GND GND 46 H0 A DATA 0 EV B OUT Even head R data signal 0 A 47 GND GND 48 VH_CHARGEO OUT VH leakage detection ON OFF signal 0 49 VH_CHARGEI OUT VH leakage detection ON OFF signal 1 50 GND GND T 6 22 J3601 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 GND GND 2 ENCODER_B IN Carriage encoder output signal B 3 ENCODER_A IN Carriage encoder output signal A 4 CR_COVER IN Carriage cover sensor output signal 5 GND GND 6 H DASH_LICC2_B OUT Head analogue switch A D trigger signal 7 GND GND 8 HI D DATA 7 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 7 D 9 GND GND 0 H1 E HE 8_B OUT Head R heat enable signal 8 E 1 GND GND 2 HI E DATA 8 OD_B OUT Odd head R data signal 8 E 3 GND GND 4 H1 F DATA 10 OD_B OUT Odd head R data signal 10 F 5 GND GND 6 H1 E DATA 9 OD_B OUT Odd head R data signal 9 E 7 GND GND
207. nce cartridge relay PCB and the head EEPROM in addition to the on board EEPROM Motor control function This function controls the carriage motor feed motor valve motor purge motor and lift motor based on the input signals from sensors b Driver IC 1C3100 This IC generates a carriage motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC c Driver IC 1C2802 This IC generates feed motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC d Driver IC 1C2900 This IC generates purge motor and vaive motor control signals based on the control signal from the ASIC e DIMMs 1C601 1C602 1C603 1C604 The DIMM comprising a 128 MB SDR SDRAM is connected to the 32 bit data bus to be used as a work area During print data reception it is also used as an image buffer It cannot be expanded f FLASH ROM 1C701 1C703 A 128 MB flash ROM is connected to the 8 bit data bus to store the printer control program g EEPROM 1C802 The 128 KB EEPROM stores various setting values adjustment values log data counter values related to the user servicing h SO DIMM The 256 MB SO DIMM J401 is connected to the 32 bit data bus to be used as a work area During print data reception it is also used as an image buffer It cannot be expanded i HDD controller IC1201 This controller control the hard disk drive MEMO After replacement of the main controller PCB the printer must be started up in the service mode to take
208. ng parts Check the flexible cable unit and surrounding parts Check that the printhead is attached correctly Replace the main controller PCB Replace the printhead Replace the carriage unit 03060A00 2E33 Roll media is not loaded when receiving the printing job Set the roll media Roll printing is selected 03060A00 2E37 Roll media is not loaded when printing Set the roll media 03060100 2E05 Cut sheet is not loaded when receiving the printing job Set the cut sheet Sheet printing is selected 03060100 2E02 Cut sheet is not loaded when printing Set the cut sheet Borderless printng not possible Check supported paper 03864004 240A Borderless printing disabled unsupported size when pressing the Load button Check the media size Change the media size Borderless printng not possible Check roll 03864004 2409 Paper loaded at a position inaccessible for borderless printing Check to see if a borderless printing spacer is installed position Reload the paper PaprWidth Mismatch 03063000 2E08 Roll media width mismatch Change the roll media PaprWidth Mismatch 03864001 2E45 Roll media width mismatch when pressing the Load Change the roll media button Paper mismatch Make sure media type and paper size match for the adjustment print 03060000 2E20 Cut sheet type or size is not match when printing the printhead registration Change th
209. nit This unit converts the RGB multi value image data or CMYK multi value data received from the host computer through the interface connector to the binary image data for the ink colors used DMA controller This controller control DMA transfer of the data transferred through the input interfaces such as the USB and expansion card slot as well as DMA transfer of the data stored in the DIMM Image data generation output function This function generates image data for color printing from the received image data and the mask pattern corresponding to print mode stored in the FLASH ROM and stored the generated image data in DIMM It also outputs the generated image data to the carriage PCB Interrupt controller This controller receives and processes internal interrupts and external interrupts from the USB image processing unit and expansion card slot Timer function Even when the printer is turned off the timer function is held on using the RTC IC803 and lithium battery BAT801 to assist the cleaning function When the power cord is plugged to the outlet power is supplied to the RTC and therefore the lithium battery power is not consumed Heat Enable signal control function This function uses the pulse width to perform variable control of the time of application of the Heat Enable signal to the nozzle heater board for each printhead nozzle array Linear scale count function This function reads the linear scale when the carriage moves thus gen
210. nstalled Install a R ink tank No ink tank loaded Press OK and check ink tank 03830109 252B B ink tank not installed Install a B ink tank No ink tank loaded Press OK and check ink tank 03830108 252C G ink tank not installed Install a G ink tank Top cover is open Turn off printer wait a while and turn it on again 0303 1000 2F38 Top cover abnormally open Close the top cover and turn on the printer again Ink tank cover is open Turn off printer wait a while and turn it on again 03031000 2E10 Ink tank cover abnormally open Close the ink tank cover and turn on the printer again Maintenance cartridge full Replace the maintenance cartridge 03841001 2819 Maintenance cartridge full Renew the maintenance cartridge No Maintenance Cartridge capacity Replace the maintenance cartridge 03841001 281B Not enough space in the maintenance cartridge prior to cleaning Replace the maintenance cartridge Maintenance cartridge problem Replace the maintenance cartridge 03841201 2816 Maintenance cartridge EEPROM error Renew the maintenance cartridge Maintenance cartridge problem Replace the maintenance cartridge 03841201 2817 Maintenance cartridge ID error Renew the maintenance cartridge Chapter 8 Display massage Code Condition detected Action Borderless printng not possi
211. o ink tank loaded 01810106 1416 MBK ink tank removal Attach the MBK ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01810104 1410 BK ink tank removal Attach the BK ink tank Check ink tank The paper is too small 013200D2 1051 Size clip error Check the media size check Change the media size Maximum jobs stored 011A1006 2907 Saved jobs exceed the Personal Box capacity Press the stop button to cancel the print job Delete unwanted data Delete print jobs from the queue Delete unneeded jobs stored on the hard disk No ink tank loaded 01830103 1413 C ink tank removal during printing Attach the C ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01830102 1412 M ink tank removal during printing Attach the M ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01830101 1411 Y ink tank removal during printing Attach the Y ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01830106 1416 MBK ink tank removal during printing Attach the MBK ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01830106 1417 MBK ink tank removal during printing Attach the MBK ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01830104 1410 BK ink tank removal during printing Attach the BK ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01830112 1414 PM ink tank removal during printing Attach the BK ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01830113 1415 PC ink tank removal during printing Attach the BK ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01830105 1418 G
212. of display Shows the printer status and a menu name 4 Setup Adjustment tab This tab shows the printer status and menu related to setup adjustment When this tab is shown in reverse video pressing the OK button displays the Setup Adjustment menu A Top field of display Shows the setup adjustment icon in reverse video B Middle field of display Shows the printer status and a menu name C Bottom field of display Shows the remaining ink level of the maintenance cartridge Chapter 1 1 6 3 Menu The printer has a Main menu which includes a menu related to maintenance such as adjustment of ink ejection position of each nozzle and head cleaning a menu related to printing settings such as auto cutting and ink drying time and a menu related to parameters such as a message language 1 Menu Operation a Displaying menu on each tab Press key P gt key on the Tab Selection screen to select a tab and press the OK key A menu associated with each tab is displayed Press the key or Y key to select a menu and press the OK key The menu is selected and menu items are displayed Select a menu with on the left side and press the OK key to navigate to lower level menus b Setting menu items Press the A key or Y key to select an item to set and press the OK key The item is checked on the left side check box to confirm that it is set After 2 seconds the menu that is one level above is displayed
213. of saved jobs Job Log Choose from Document Name Indicates the document name of the selected print job information User Name Indicates the name of the user who sent the print job about the latest three print Page Count Indicates the number of pages in the job jobs Job Status Indicates the printing results Print Start Time Indicates when the print job was started Print End Time Indicates when the print job was finished Print Time Indicates the time required to print the job Print Size Indicates the paper size in the print job Media Type Indicates the type of paper in the print job Interface Indicates the interface used for the print job Ink Consumed Indicates a rough estimate of how much ink was consumed per job Print Job Log Print the print job information such as paper type size and ink consumption Ink consumption is the approximate amount of ink used to print one sheet Pause Print Select On to stop printing HDD Information Indicates the total hard disk capacity and the mail box free space 1 27 Chapter 1 Set Adj Menu T 1 17 Setting Item Description Instructions Test Print Nozzle Check Print a nozzle check pattern Status Print Print the printer information Interface Print Print the interface settings Paper Details Prints the paper settings set with Paper Details Print Job Log Print print job informati
214. of time before delivery The wait time is user programmable from the print driver This feature is particularly useful on paper that takes time to dry after printing such as films 2 2 7 White Raster Skip This printer supports a white raster skip function to bypass carriage scanning in a consecutive sequence of voids in print data for added throughput 2 2 8 Sleep Mode The printer has sleep mode to save on its standby power requirement The printer transitions to sleep mode automatically when it has been left idle or no print data has been received for a predetermined period of time while the printer is online or offline The printer exits sleep mode when any operation panel key is activated or print data is received from the host computer The time to transition to sleep mode is variable from the operation panel Default Sminutes 2 2 9 Hard Disk Drive This printer features a hard disk drive which provides the following functions Early release of the host computer Error recovery Job preservation Preserved job print Job queue handling 1 Early release of the host computer Each print job received from the host computer is preserved to the hard disk drive attached to the printer so the printer can proceed with independent printing releasing the host computer before the print job completes 2 Error recovery If a print job aborts as a result of any print problem such as a paper jam or insufficient paper the printer
215. ol circuit generation circuit Transformer 5V 3 3V 5 1V generation circuit Rectifying circuit generation circuit F 2 29 The power supply converts AC voltages ranging from 100V to 240V from the AC inlet to DC voltages for driving the ICs motor and others The voltage generator circuits include the 32V generation circuit for driving motors fans and the 5 1V generator circuit for driving sensors logic circuits When in the power saving mode the power supply cut out the 32V and the 5 1V Power ON OFF operation is controlled by the main controller PCB When the upper cover is open the power supply cut out only the 32V power to the carriage 2 31 Chapter 2 2 5 Detection Functions with Sensors 2 5 1 Sensors for covers Ink tank cover switch Pressure release switch Upper cover lock switch Upper cover lock switch L R The microswitch based upper cover lock switches detect the open closed states of the upper cover When the upper cover close the switches are pressed to detect the closed state of the upper cover The printer has one switch installed on the left and right sides each to prevent one sided closure of the upper cover Ink tank cover switch L R The microswitch based ink tank cover switches detect the open closed states of ink tank covers When an ink tank cover closes the switches are pressed to detect the closed state of the ink tank cover Pressure release s
216. on such as paper type size and ink consumption Ink consumption is the approximate amount of ink used to print one sheet Menu Map Print the menu list Adjust Printer Head Posi Adj Auto Standard The printer prints and reads a test pattern for automatic adj relative to the printing direction ustment of Printhead alignment Auto Advanced The printer prints and reads a test pattern for automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction and spacing between nozzles and colors Try adjustment in this mode if Auto Standard does not improve printing Auto Expansion The printer prints and reads a test pattern for automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction and spacing between nozzles and colors Adjustment is performed at a higher level of precision than Auto Advanced Try adjustment in this mode if vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment when the printer driver option High Precision Printing or Priority on dot placement accuracy is selected Manual Print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction Enter the adjustment value manually based on the resulting pattern Feed Priority Adj Priority Automatic Print Quality Print Length Set the priority feed precision Normally select Automatic Select Print Quality to print at h
217. ontroller PCB which reads and writes the content of that EEPROM Therefore initializing the counter information will not be needed when the maintenance cartridge is replaced 5 Refilling the ink After removing the ink in the printer according to the automatic or manual ink draining procedure to disassemble reassemble or transport ship the printer refill the ink as soon as possible upon completion of those tasks Tf the ink remaining in the printer after the removal has dried up the ink deposits on the surfaces of the components may cause damage or abnormal operation 1 45 Chapter 1 1 7 3 Precautions When Servicing Printer 1 7 3 1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer This printer counts the print length number of ink tank replacements carriage driving time number of cleaning operations number of cutter operations and so on and stores them in the main controller s EEPROM as a COUNTER in Service mode COUNTER provides important information about the printer usage status You can check this information by printing it in the service mode or displaying it on the display Following the precautions below when servicing the printer 1 Repairing replacing the PCB When replacing the main controller follow the specified replacement procedure For the main controller replacement procedure see Disassembly Reassembly gt Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly gt Boards 2 After replacing the carriage unit The
218. operations Times CLN A 11 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 11 ink filling after head replacement operations Times CLN A 15 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 15 dot count small suction operations Times CLN A 16 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 16 sedimented ink agitation operations Times CLN A 17 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 17 small suction operations Times CLN A TTL Total number of automatic cleaning operations Times CLN M 1 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 normal suction operations Times CLN M 4 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 4 ink draining from head after head replacement operations Times CLN M 5 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 5 ink draining from head and tube before transportation operations Times CLN M 6 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 6 normal strong suction operations Times CLN M TTL Total number of manual cleaning operations Times Chapter 7 4 CLEAR Counters related to counter initialization T 7 22 Display Description Unit Remarks CLR INK CONSUME Cumulative count of ink section consumption amount clearing Times CLR MTC EXC Cumulative count of maintenance cartridge replacement count clearing Times CLR HEAD L EXC Cumulative count of printhead L replacement count clearing Times CLR HEAD R EXC Cumulative count of printhead R replacement count clearing Times CLR Wia 1 EXC Cumulati
219. other than the Power button wakes up the printer Chapter 1 1 6 2 Display When the printer starts the tab selection screen appears on the display There are four types of tabs on which the relevant printer status menu and error information are displayed The tab appears as the icon to the top field of display The tab moves by 4 key P key 1 2 3 14 F 1 22 1 Media tab This tab shows the printer status and menu related to media When this tab is shown in reverse video pressing the OK button displays the Media menu A Top field of display Shows the media icon in reverse video B Middle field of display Shows the printer status and a menu name C Bottom field of display Shows the media type in the first row and the media size in the second row 2 Ink tab This tab shows the printer status and menu related to ink When this tab is shown in reverse video pressing the OK button displays the Ink menu A Top field of display Shows the ink icon in reverse video B Middle field of display Shows the printer status and a menu name C Bottom field of display Shows the remaining ink levels of the ink tanks loaded in the printer 3 Job tab This tab shows the printer status and menu related to the print job When this tab is shown in reverse video pressing the OK button displays the Job menu A Top field of display Shows the job icon in reverse video B Middle field
220. over the setting and adjustment values to the new PCB properly the service mode will be switched to the PCB replacement mode automatically 2 29 Chapter 2 2 4 3 Carriage Relay PCB 2 4 3 1 Carriage relay PCB components CI F 2 25 a Image data relay function This function relays the image data from the main controller PCB to the printhead The function for processing image data is not supported b Sensor relay function This function relays the input signals from the multi sensor lift cam sensor carriage cover sensor and linear encoder to the main controller PCB 2 4 4 Head Relay PCB 2 4 4 1 Head relay PCB components IC304 IC301 F 2 26 a Latch IC 1C301 1C304 DI sensor read control function Obtains reading value of the DI sensor in the printhead and the head rank value for each color and outputs them to the main controller based on the control commands from the main controller Environment temperature read control function Outputs the environment temperature detected by the thermistor on the head relay PCB to the main controller based on the control commands from the main con troller Relay function of the power to the logic com
221. ower supply 16 H1 E DATA 9 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 9 E 17 HI F HE 11 OUT Head L heat enable signal 11 F 18 HI E DIAI IN Head L DI sensor signal 1 E 19 HI D DIAI IN Head L DI sensor signal 1 D 20 H3V 1 OUT Power supply 21 H3V 1 OUT Power supply 22 HI B DATA 3 EV OUT Even head L data signal 3 B 23 H1 A DATA 0 EV OUT Even head L data signal 0 A 24 HI B HE 2 OUT Head L heat enable signal 2 B 25 VHI OUT Power supply 26 VHI OUT Power supply 27 H1 D DIA2 IN Head L DI sensor signal 2 D 28 HI E HE 8 OUT Head L heat enable signal 8 E 29 HI E DIA2 IN Head L DI sensor signal 2 E 30 HI F DIA2 IN Head L DI sensor signal 2 F 31 HI E HE 9 OUT Head L heat enable signal 9 E 32 H1 D DATA 7 EV OUT Even head L data signal 7 D 33 H1 D HE 6 OUT Head L heat enable signal 6 D 34 H1 C DATA 5 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 5 C 35 H1 C DATA 4 EV OUT Even head L data signal 4 C 36 H1 A DATA 1 EV OUT Even head L data signal 1 A 37 HI A DIA2 IN Head L DI sensor signal 2 A 38 HI B DIA2 IN Head L DI sensor signal 2 B 39 1 4 OUT Head L heat enable signal 4 C 40 H1 D DATA 7 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 7 D 41 H1 E DATA 8 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 8 E 42 HI F HE 10 OUT Head L heat enable signal 10 F 43 HI F DATA 11 EV OUT Even head L data signal 11 F 44 HI E DATA 8 EV OUT Even head L data signal 8 E 45 H1 D DATA 6 EV OUT Even head L data signal 6 D 46 HI C DIA2 IN Head L DI sensor signal 2 C 47 H1 C DA
222. ower supply 3V 2 IO ASIC SCL IN OUT Multi sensor EEPROM control signal clock 3 IO ASIC SDA IN OUT Multi sensor EEPROM control signal data 4 GND GND 5 PWLEDI OUT Multi sensor LEDI drive signal 6 PWLED2 OUT Multi sensor LED2 drive signal 7 PWLED3 OUT Multi sensor LED3 drive signal 8 PWLEDA OUT Multi sensor LED4 drive signal 9 GND GND 10 MLT SNS 1 IN Multi sensor signal 1 11 MLT_SNS_2 IN Multi sensor signal 2 12 SNSSV 1 OUT Power supply 5V T 6 44 J502 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 SNS5V_0 OUT Power supply 5V 2 GND GND 3 LIFT_CAM_IN IN Lift cam sensor output signal T 6 45 J601 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 VH2 OUT Power supply 2 VH2 OUT Power supply 3 VH2 OUT Power supply 4 VHT12 OUT Head transistor drive power supply 2 H1 F DATA 10 EV OUT Even head L data signal 10 F 6 IO_ASIC_SDA IN OUT Head ROM control signal data 7 IO ASIC SCL OUT Head ROM control signal clock 8 VH2 OUT Power supply 9 HI C DIAI IN Head L DI sensor signal 1 C 10 1 1 OUT Head L heat enable signal 1 A 11 VHI OUT Power supply 12 VHI OUT Power supply 13 VHI OUT Power supply 6 25 Chapter 6 6 26 J601 Pin Number Signal name INOUT Function 14 VH2 OUT Power supply 15 VH2 OUT P
223. oxes Hard disk error Press OK to reformat 031A 1002 2908 Hard disk format error Press the OK button to start reformatting the hard disk When formatting is finished the printer automatically restarts File read error Turn off printer wait a while and turn it on again Invalid files will be deleted 031A 1002 2909 Hard disk file error Restart the printer Only the corrupted files will be deleted and the printer will restart Hardware error 03800500 2F31 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03800500 2F31 Non discharge detection optical axis error Check the head management sensor Replace the head management sensor Replace the printhead Hardware error 03130031 2F3C Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F3C LF pressure error Check the pinch roller and surrounding parts Replace the pinch roller pressure drive unit Media Take up error Check the paper Press Online to clear error 03890000 2920 Media take up unit cannot take up the media Check to see if paper has not jammed Rewinding error Check for jam at indicated position Press Online to clear error 03890000 2921 Media take up take up the media continuously Check the media take up paper detection sensor and surrounding part Replace the media take up paper detection sensor No printhead Install printhead 03800100 2800 Printhead not installed Install th
224. ply valve is open when the sensor light is shielded by a flag linked with the valve cam Agitation cam sensor The photointerrupter based agitation cam sensor detects the status of the agitation cam The sensor detects the agitation cam home position when the sensor light allows it to be transmitted Ink detection sensor The ink detection sensor detects the presence or absence of the ink in an ink tank with respect to the status of continuity between two hollow needles When the ink level in the tank falls to a point below the wall surrounding the hollow needles in the air passage continuity with the hollow needle on the ink supply side is disrupted causing the sensor to detect that the ink is out Ink tank wa rs Te Rubber plug Needle ink supply Needle air passage F 2 34 Head management sensor The photo transmission type sensor detects that the printhead is discharging ink The carriage moves to and stops at the detection positions for individual nozzle arrays When the carriage is at a stop nozzles discharge ink on after another The sensor detects each nozzle due to the voltage change caused when ink discharged from the nozzle blocks the sensor light Non discharging nozzle detection is carried out at the following timings After the execution of Cleaning 1 Cleaning 2 Cleaning 3 Cleaning 6 or Cleaning 10 After the number of copies that has been set by the user menu choice Nozzle Check Frequency have been printed If mo
225. ponents in the printhead Supplies the power to the logic components in the printhead based on the control commands from the main controller b Multi sensor control IC These IC s generates the LED control signals and makes gain adjustment for the multi sensor c Image data relay function This function relays the image data from the main controller PCB to the printhead d Sensor relay function This function relays the input signals from the multi sensor lift cam sensor carriage cover sensor and linear encoder to the main controller PCB 2 30 Chapter 2 2 4 5 Motor Driver 2 4 5 1 Media take up PCB components 10104 TE O O F 2 27 a Driver IC 1C104 Media take up motor drive function This function controls the Media take up motor based on the control signals from the main controller Sensor relay function This function relays the input signals from the Media take up paper detection sensor and Media take up on off sensor to the main controller PCB 2 4 6 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB 2 4 6 1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components F 2 28 a EEPROM OCH The 2 KB EEPROM stores all information written in the EEPROM on the main controller PCB 2 4 7 Power Supply 2 4 7 1 Power supply block diagram AC inlet 100V to 240V Operation panel Main controller PCB Power supply DC power suppl POWER ON PPy 921 Noize filter circuit contr
226. pressing this button at the item preceded by allows you to move to the bottom layer of menu items where you can execute a menu item or set values Also press this button when a message asking you to press the OK button is shown on the display 7 Back button Pressing this button displays the preceding screen 8 Menu button Pressing this button displays the tab selection screen screen 9 Media Cut button When roll media is loaded pressing this button cuts the media 10 Media Feed button When roll media is loaded pressing this button allows you to change the media position 11 Media Change button Press this button when loading replacing media 12 Cut Sheet lamp green This lamp stays lit when cut sheet is selected as a media type 13 Roll Media lamp green This lamp stays lit when roll media is selected as a media type 14 Message lamp orange Stays lit A warning message is being displayed Blinking An error message is being displayed Not lit The printer is normal or not powered 15 Data reception lamp green Blinking When the printer is making prints this lamp indicates that a print job is being received or processed When the printer is not making prints this lamp indicates that the print job is suspended or the firmware data is being received Not lit This lamp indicates that there is no print job MEMO When the printer is in the sleep mode pressing any button
227. quence The signal sequence from when the printer receives the print signals until printing starts is shown in Figure Host computer en Mask pattern data Heat pulse Command data gt PCI bus EE Data bus MED Universal sirial bus Printer driver Interface unit USB i EEPROM ASIC IC1 L COA mage processing unit SDRAM 9 P EERSSRER EEPROM d SDRAM e FLASH ROM Carriage PCB nk tank me ME i F 2 Sensor and drive unit Main controller F 2 2 a The printer driver on the host computer transmits print data including command data to the printer after compressing the image data without resolution color and 12 color binarization conversion To achieve high quality image output the image processing table data used for image data color conversion and binarization conversion are generated as command data to meet the Media Type and other specifications of the printer driver b This printer receives print data from the individual interfaces on the main controller transmitting the received print data to ASIC IC1 c The main controller decompresses the print data transmitted to the ASIC and gets it through resolution color and 12 color binarization conversion while loading the data into SDRAM from time to time It also converts the print data to 12 color binary equivalents of image and command data d The ASIC IC1 generat
228. r its retransmission from the host computer Saving print jobs will offer the following benefits Eased computer workload A print job may be automatically preserved to the hard disk when printing or may be preserved to the hard disk without printing A print job preserved can be printed in as many copies as needed without having to use the host computer Reprinting after error occurrence Tf the printer encounters errors such as paper out while printing a print job it can resume the print operation as soon as the errors are cleared without needing its retransmission from the host computer Higher print work efficiency Print jobs can be printed selectively or in a specified number of copies without using a host computer Multiple print jobs can be printed batched Unattended print operations in the nighttime are also possible 1 2 9 Consumables Printhead The expendable printhead is the same as the one that comes with the printer F 1 13 Ink tanks Expendable ink tanks contain 12 colors mat black black photocyan cyan photomagenta magenta yellow red blue green gray and photogray Each tank is available in two capacities 330 mL and 700 mL Usable for six months after unpacking 7 Y F 1 14 Maintenance cartridge The expendable maintenance cartridge including the shaft cleaner is the same as the one that comes with the printer F 1 15 1 7 Chapter 1 1 3 Product Specifications
229. r larger roll 03010000 2E1F Undersized paper loaded for internal printing roll media Replace with roll media at least 10 inches in width Cannot feed paper Remove paper and press Load Eject 03010000 2E25 Paper jam while feeding ejecting printing Remove the paper jam and reload the paper Cannot feed paper Lift the release lever and reload paper 03010000 2E27 Paper jam during feeding printing ejection Reload the paper This paper cannot be used Check supported paper sizes 03010000 200E Undersized paper cut sheets roll media Replace with larger sized paper This paper cannot be used Check supported paper sizes 03010000 200F Oversized paper cut sheets roll media Replace with smaller sized paper Use another paper Press Online to clear the error 03010000 2F33 Unadjustable because of transparent media Replace with adjustable media Paper loaded askew Lift the release lever 03016000 2010 Skew Correct the skew in the paper and reload it Paper size not detected Reload paper 03010000 200A Unable to detect the paper width Paper loaded at an improper position Reload the paper Cannot adjust eccentric Press Online to clear the error 03863000 2822 Eccentricity correction disabled Check to see if paper has not jammed Chapter 8 Display massage Code Condition detected Act
230. r maintenance purposes such as head cleaning is absorbed Replace the cartridge when it is full 15 Operation Panel Use this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status Chapter 1 1 5 2 Rear F 1 17 1 Ethernet Port Connect an Ethernet cable to this port The lamp is lit if the Ethernet cable is connected correctly and communication is possible between the computer and printer 2 USB Port Connect a USB cable to this port This port is compatible with USB 2 0 Hi Speed mode 3 Accessory Pocket Holds printer manuals assembly tools and other items 4 Media Take up Unit Power Inlet Connect the power cord of the Media Take up Unit here 5 Power Supply Connector Connect the power cord to this connector 6 Carrying handles When carrying the printer have six people hold it by these handles under both sides Chapter 1 1 5 3 Top Cover Inside 8 1 Top Cover Roller Prevents paper from rising when ejected 2 Carriage Moves the Printhead The carriage serves a key role in printing 3 Borderless Printing Ink Grooves These grooves catch ink outside the edges of paper during borderless printing 4 Fixed Blade The Cutter Unit passes through this blade to cut paper 5 Platen The Printhead moves across the platen to print The Vacuum holes on the platen hold paper in place 6 Pinch Roller Important in supplying the paper This
231. rain is supplied with an ink from the common nozzle chamber A head drive current subsequently flowing through the nozzle heater boils the ink generating bubbles to discharge ink drops from the nozzle assembly Resin Sillicon plate Heater Heater Shared ink chamber F 2 14 2 15 Chapter 2 2 3 2 5 Purge Unit 2 3 2 5 1 Functions of Purge Unit To maintain high print quality the purge unit performs maintenance of the nozzles o the printhead The purge unit supports a capping function cleaning function and ink supply function a Capping function The capping function presses the cap of the purge unit against the face plate on the nozzle section of the printhead to prevent nozzle drying and dust adhesion Capping is performed when printing is complete at the start of the suction operation and when switching to the standby state due to an error The capping function also establishes the ink passage between the printhead and purge unit b Cleaning function The cleaning function restores the printhead to the state where ink can be easily discharged from nozzles This function includes the following three types of oper ations Wiping operation This operation is performed to remove paper fibers and dried ink from to the face plate Pumping operation This operation is performed to remove ink from the nozzles and fill the nozzles with fresh ink Maintenance jet operation This operation is performed to spray ink from t
232. re is a DNS server in use find out the following Primary DNS server address Secondary DNS server address optional Information item 3 Is there a proxy server Tf there is a proxy server in use find out the following Proxy server address Port number connected to proxy server Information item 4 Is proxy server authentication required If proxy server authentication is required find out the following User name and password required for proxy authentication 3 Network settings Make the network settings based on the information obtained in 2 Advance preparations Network settings are made in user mode Therefore it is assumed that the user has already set it However there are a few cautions as described below and if necessary there may be cases in which the service technicians do it after obtaining an approval from user Caution point 1 DNS server settings Under the present specs DNS server settings cannot be entered from the operation panel menu Use Remote UI to enter Caution point 2 Proxy server settings Proxy server settings cannot be made in Remote UT Enter from the operation panel menu In addition the operation panel menu items for proxy server only appear when e RDS functions are enabled Therefore when you make proxy server settings turn the E RDS SWITCH setting to ON as described in later sections 7 27 Chapter 7 beforehand Caution point 3 Validate the settings restart
233. re than a specified number of non discharging nozzles have been located in one session of non discharging nozzle detection the normal cleaning sequence is launched before a second session of non discharging nozzle detection is conducted If more than a specified number of non discharging nozzles are located in the second session of non discharging nozzle detection the normal High cleaning session is launched before a third session of non discharging nozzle detection is conducted Tf there are at least 320 non discharging nozzles out of 2560 nozzles as the result of non discharging nozzle detection printing is canceled after displaying a message to replace the head However if service mode SERVICE MODE gt SETTING gt HEAD DOT INF is ON the following message appears Tf there are at least 30 nozzles unable to correct the non discharging state and the number of non discharging nozzles is less than 100 out of 2 560 nozzles as the result of non discharging nozzle detection printing can continue after displaying a message to check the printing Also if the number of non discharging nozzles is at least 100 but less than 320 nozzles printing can continue after displaying a message to check the head And if there are at least 320 non discharging nozzles printing is canceled after displaying a message to replace the head Printhead Nozzle unit Head management sensor unit F 2 35 2 34 Chapter 2 2 5 3 Carriage s
234. reloads the print job stored on the hard disk so it can resume the print job without having to retransmit the job from the host computer to it 3 Job preservation Print jobs are in the common box a place of temporary data storage and in the personal box a place of permanent data storage Normal print jobs are stored in the common box as they are received Due to the limited hard disk space available jobs stored in the common box are deleted from the oldest one in sequence Print jobs can be simply stored in the personal box without printing Print jobs stored in the common box can be moved to the personal box 4 Preserved job handling Print jobs stored in the personal box or common box can be printed from the operation panel 5 Job queue handling Multiple jobs queued for print can be handled including the raising priority order of selected jobs in the queue or canceling selected print jobs 2 7 Chapter 2 2 3 Printer Mechanical System 2 3 1 Outline 2 3 1 1 Outline The printer mechanism is broken down into two broad sections ink passage and paper passage The ink passage consists primarily of carriage unit 2 that houses ink tanks 1 and a printhead purge unit 3 and maintenance cartridge 4 and supplies circulates sucks and otherwise handles inks The paper passage consists of mechanical components such as a paper feed unit 5 and is designed to feed convey and deliver paper in two ways A summary description of e
235. replace the ink Ink tank is empty 01810303 1403 C ink tank empty Renew the C ink tank Replace the ink tank Ink tank is empty 01810302 1402 M ink tank empty Renew the M ink tank Replace the ink tank Ink tank is empty 01810301 1401 Y ink tank empty Renew the Y ink tank Replace the ink tank Ink tank is empty 01810306 1406 MBK ink tank empty Renew the MBK ink tank Replace the ink tank Ink tank is empty 01810304 1400 BK ink tank empty Renew the BK ink tank Replace the ink tank Ink tank is empty 01810312 1404 PM ink tank empty Renew the PM ink tank Replace the ink tank Ink tank is empty 01810313 1405 PC ink tank empty Renew the PC ink tank Replace the ink tank Ink tank is empty 01810305 1408 GY ink tank empty Renew the GY ink tank Replace the ink tank Ink tank is empty 01810315 1409 PGY ink tank empty Renew the PGY ink tank Replace the ink tank Ink tank is empty 01810307 140A R ink tank empty Renew the R ink tank Replace the ink tank Ink tank is empty 01810309 140B B ink tank empty Renew the B ink tank Replace the ink tank Ink tank is empty 01810308 140C G ink tank empty Renew the G ink tank Replace the ink tank No ink tank loaded 01810103 1413 C ink tank removal Attach the C ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01810102 1412 M ink tank removal Attach the M ink tank Check ink tank No ink tank loaded 01810101 1411 Y ink tank removal Attach the Y ink tank Check ink tank N
236. rface Print Print the interface settings Return Defaults Select OK to return the Interface Setup settings to factory default 1 29 Chapter 1 1 30 T 1 19 Setting Item Description Instructions System Setup Sleep Timer Specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode Buzzer Set the buzzer Choose On for the buzzer to sound once for warnings and three times for errors Contrast Adj Adjust the Display Screen contrast level Date amp Time Date Set the current date Time Set the current time This can be set only when Date is set Date Format Specify the date format Language Specify the language used on the Display Screen Time Zone Specify the time zone Time zone options indicate a main city in this time zone and the difference from Greenwich Mean Time Length Unit Choose the unit of measurement when roll length is displayed You can switch the unit displayed for the remaining paper amount Detect Mismatch Set the printing behavior when the paper type and size set with the printer menu does not match the paper type and size set with the printer driver Select Pause to pause printing Select Warning to print a warning and continue printing Select None to continue printing without displaying a warning Select Hold Job to queue the job with different paper type and size in a job queue on the hard disk Paper
237. riage position initialization Remaining ink level detection Waste ink level detection y Power on automatic recovery operation v Capping v Waiting for print operation Initialization of software Initialization of various devices Engine startup status check Previous power off status check etc Printhead installation status check Ink tank installation status check EEPROM check Cassette pick up unit initialization Roll feed unit initialization Roll feed unit initialization Sensor check Recovery system return to origin Sensor check Carriage motor return to origin F 2 5 Chapter 2 2 2 2 Operation Sequence at Power off Turning off the power switch cuts off the drive voltage supply launching a firmware power off sequence as shown below A If the power cord is disconnected from the wall outlet or the upper cover or any other cover is opend the printer cancels the ongoing operation and shuts down immediately Since printhead capping may or may not have been carried out properly reconnect the power cord to the wall out and turn on the power switch Making sure that the printer has entered online mode turn off the power switch 1 Power off sequence Power button OFF Hold down for at least once second v Media ejection 4 media remains it is ejected even when printing is in progress v Power off automatic recov
238. rical contact 5 Also never attempt to disassemble reassemble the printhead or wash it with water MEMO Tf the nozzles are clogged or an ink suction problem occurs white lines can appear on the printout a constant frequency or color dulling can occur If this problem is not resolved by cleaning operations replace the printhead with a new one F 1 40 T 1 25 1 Knob 4 Nozzles 2 Protective cap 1 5 Electrical contact 3 Protective cap 2 6 Ink port 2 Capping The printer will perform the capping operation when printing has ended or during standby due to an error in order to protect the printhead and avoid ink leakage Tf the power cord is accidentally unplugged turn off the Power button reconnect the power cord and then turn on the Power button Confirm that the printer starts up properly and enters to the Online or Offline status and then power off the printer using the Power button Improper capping operation may cause clogged nozzles due to dried ink or ink leakage from the printhead 3 When the printer is not used for a long time Keep the printhead installed in the printer even when it is not used for an extended period of time A If the printhead is left uninstalled a printing failure may arise from closed nozzles due to depositing of foreign matter or dried ink when it is reinstalled Even if the head remains installed the nozzle may dry out and cause a printing failure if the ink
239. rn off the printer power Turn on the power while pressing the Load key and Navigate key Keep pressing the above keys until Initializing is displayed S appears at the top right of the display Press the or key to choose the Set Adj Menu and press the OK key SERVICE MODE appears in the menu list and the MESSAGE LED flashes Press the A key or Y key to choose SERVICE MODE and press the OK key 2 Set the following e RDS setting items No 1 4 If the result of the communication test COM TEST is NG execute setting items No 5 6 to solve the problem T 7 40 No Item Type Description 1 E RDS SWITCH 2 bytes OFF Disable ON Enable e Maintenance image WARE Remote system to send device information meter data and error statuses to the UGW Default value is OFF not in use 2 UGW ADDRESS 129 bytes The UGW address by default https a01 NULL The complete address is not provided in this document for security reason included SJIS not allowed 3 UGW PORT 4 bytes The UGW Port Number by default 443 Validation 1 65535 4 COM TEST To perform Communication test with UGW and set OK NG as the result COM LOG Detailed communication data log Switches to display time when error occurred error code and error data up to now Max 30 loggings retained Max 128 characters not containing NULL for Error information 6 ERDS DAT Initialize e RDS setting data
240. ror as https a01 4 Server connection error An UGW connection error Displayed in the event Check the network related settings according to No 1 of a TCP IP communication fault Communication test is not performed in Troubleshooting 5 URL server specified is illegal A URL different to that specified by the UGW has Check that the value of UGW ADR has been entered correctly been set An URL address setting error as https a01 6 Proxy connection error Cannot connect to proxy server Check proxy server address and re enter if necessary Displayed when unable to connect to proxy server 7 Proxy authentication error Displayed when the authentication to the proxy Check the user name and password required in order to login server has failed to the proxy and re enter if necessary 8 Server certificate error Device s route certificate is unavailable Reinstall the latest device system software firmware Upgrade 9 Server certificate expired The route certificate registered with the device has Check that the device time and date are correctly set If the expired device time and date are correct upgrade to the latest system software firmware 10 Unknown error Some other kind of communication error has Try again after a period of time If the same error occurs again occurred check the UGW status with the UGW administrator 11 SOAP Fault SOAP communication error has occurred Check that the value of UGW PORT is 443 12 Server response
241. rt change statuses Toner ink low out etc Device monitor information above is sent by the e RDS embedded Remote Diagnostic System which is embedded in the devices Further as the above is all customer information https SOAP protocol is used for communication between the UGW and the device providing enhanced security SSL client communication F 7 22 2 Feature and benefits Device e RDS embedded with network module can realize a front end processing of the e Maintenance imageW ARE Remote system without attaching an extra hardware equipment The e Maintenance imageW ARE Remote system can be implemented without imposing a burden on the users 3 Settings procedures 3 1 Advance preparations To monitor the device with e Maintenance image WARE Remote the following settings are required 1 Advance confirmation Check with the UGW administrator whether the printer to be connected to the e Maintenance imageW ARE remotely has been registered in the UGW 2 Advance preparations Interview the user s system administrator in advance to find out the following information about the network Information item 1 IP address setting methods Check whether automatic setting or manual setting is to be used and confirm the information below Automatic setting DHCP RARP BOOTP ON OFF selection or Manual setting IP address subnet mask and gateway address to be set Information item 2 Is there a DNS server in use Tf the
242. s XXXXXXXXXXXX Interface Print 12 Return Defaults 12 System Setup Sleep Timer 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 40 min 50 min 60 min 240 min Buzzer Off On Contrast Adj 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 Date amp Time 12 Date yyyy mm dd 14 Time hh mm Date Format 12 yyyy mm dd dd mm yyyy mm dd yyyy Language English Japanese Francais Italiano Deutsch Espanol Russian Chinese simplified Korean Chapter 1 T 1 11 First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level System Setup Time Zone 12 0 London GMT 1 Paris Rome 2 Athens Cairo 3 Moscow 4 Eerevan Baku 5 Islamabad 6 Dacca 7 Bangkok 8 Hong Kong 9 Tokyo Seoul 10 Canberra 11NewCaledonia 12 Wellington 12 Eniwetok 11 Midway is 10Hawaii AHST 9 Alaska AKST 8 Oregon PST 7 Arizona MST 6 Texas CST 5 New York EST 4 Santiago 3 Buenos Aires 2 1 Cape Verde Length Unit meter feet inch Detect Mismatch Pause Warning None Hold Job 2
243. s Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS Wia 6 CR 1 EXC CR 1 carriage unit bushing replacement count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS CR 1 CR 2 EXC CR 2 linear encoder sensor linear scale shaft cleaner replacement count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS CR 2 CR 3 EXC CR 3 carriage height changing cam replacement count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS CR 3 CR 4 EXC CR 4 ink tube unit flexible cable unit replacement count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS CR 4 CR 5 EXC CR 5 multi sensor replacement count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS CR 5 PG 1 EXC PG 1 purge unit replacement count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS 1 HMa 1 EXC HMa 1 head management sensor replacement count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS HMa 1 PL 1 EXC PL 1 carriage motor replacement count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS PL 1 PS 1 EXC PS 1 feed motor replacement count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS PS 1 Mi 1 EXC Mi 1 mist fan replacement count Times Count of executing INITIALIZE gt PARTS COUNTER gt PARTS Mi 1 MS 1 EXC MS 1 multi sensor replacement
244. s Error code Last 4 digits Cumulative number of printed media equivalent of A4 7 37 Chapter 7 7 38 Print item Print content Printed value JAM 01 to 05 JAM log 5 records Number Lowest is the most recent Date mm dd Time mm ss Error code Last 4 digits 1 Jam type 1 CR error 2 Jam 3 Feed failure delay 4 Cut failure Unknown 2 Media format 1 Roll media 2 Cut sheet manual feed from top 3 Cut sheet manual feed from front 4 Cassette Unknown 3 Jam timing 1 Feed 2 Print 3 Eject Unknown 4 Width detection OFF mode 1 ON 2 OFF Unknown 5 Head height 0 SL 1 2mm 1 L 1 4mm 2 M1 1 8mm 3 M2 2 0mm 4 M3 2 2mm 5 H 2 6mm Unknown Not Used Cut mode 1 User cut 2 Eject cut 3 Auto cut Unknown 8 Media passing environment 0 A Temperature 15 to 25 degrees centigrade Humidity 40 to 60 1 B Temperature 25 to 30 degrees centigrade Humidity 40 to 60 2 C Temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade Humidity 10 to 40 3 D Temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade Humidity 60 to 80 4 E Temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade Humidity 0 to 10 Temperature to 15 degrees centigrade from 30 degrees centigrade Humidity 0 to 50 Low humidity side not guaranteed 5 F Temperature 15 degrees centigrade to 30 degrees centigrade Humidity 80 to 100 Temperature to 15 degrees centigr
245. s clothes or the printer under repair The ink flows through the ink tank unit carriage unit purge unit maintenance jet tray borderless print ink groove maintenance cartridge and the ink tubes that relay ink to each unit 1 Maintenance jet tray 4 Carriage unit 2 Maintenance cartridge 5 Ink tank unit 3 Purge unit 6 Borderless print ink groove A Although the ink is not harmful to the human body it contains organic solvents Avoid getting the ink in your mouth or eyes Flush well with water and see a doctor if contact occurs In case of accidental ingestion of a large quantity call a doctor immediately Since this ink contains pigment stains will not come out of clothing 1 39 Chapter 1 2 Ink mist Since the printhead prints by squirting ink onto the media a minute amount of ink mist is generated in the printing unit during printing The ink mist is collected in the printer by the airflow However uncollected ink mist may stain the platen unit carriage unit main rail unit external unit or purge unit These stains may soil the print media or hands and clothes when servicing the printer wipe them off carefully with a soft well wrung damp cloth T 1 23 1 Purge unit 2 Upper cover 3 Platen unit Carriage unit Main rail unit 1 40 Chapter 1 1 7 1 3 Electric Parts The electrical unit of the printer is activated when connected to the AC power supply At the re
246. s through the rotation of the motor Wiper blades mounted on the carriage wipe the printhead while the carriage is halted at its home position Wet wiping is carried out for added wiping removal performance whereby the wiper blades are moistened with glycerin as they are pressed against an absorber impregnated with glycerin Maintenance jet ejection is carried out on the cap at the maintenance jet tray borderless printing ink tray and on the paper surface A suction operation is carried out by a suction cap in the purge unit f Carriage height adjustment unit The head height is adjusted with the carriage halted at its home position The lift motor is driven to rotate the lift shaft within the carriage in sync with which the lift cams on both sides of the carriage move the head holder up and down thereby varying the separation between the face of the printhead and the paper The printhead height is detected from the lift cam sensor within the carriage and the distance of rotation of the lift motor Chapter 2 g Multi sensor The multi sensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage consists of four LEDs red blue green infrared and two light receiving sensors to detect the leading edges and width of paper and skews in it and to adjust its registration and head height The multi sensor standard has a white plate attached to it so that a reference value can be calculated during carriage height measurement by measuring the intens
247. scraping off the inks that have been wiped off from the head with an ink scraper linked to the maintenance cartridge then wiping the blades with a blade cleaner Wet wiping is carried out for added wiping removal performance whereby the wiper blades are moistened with glycerin as they are pressed against an absorber impregnated with glycerin The quantity of glycerin used is managed by counting the number of times the wiper blades have been pressed against the absorber When this count falls to equal any of the following values either a replacement warning continued print available or replacement required indication service call error is issued T 2 7 Display Times Replacement warning indication 71 250 times Service calls 75 000 times Glycerin Ink scraper Printhead absorber Glycerin tank Wiper blades Vo Blade holder Wiper cam Cap F 2 16 2 19 Chapter 2 c Pump The pump suction pump is a tube pump that pressurizes the ink tubes with rotating rollers to generate a negative pressure for sucking inks A single tube is sequentially pressurized by a pair of rotating rollers to control the level of ink suction by a wide margin The timing at which the rotating rollers rotate is detected by the pump cam sensor with the distance of rotation being controlled by the driving of the purge motor P ump cam sensor Suction pump Rotating rollers Ink tubes LI
248. sequence 1 Paper trailing edge detection sensor 2 Multi sensor light quantity adjustment 3 Paper width detection sensor 4 Paper leading edge detection sensor 5 Paper skew detection sensor Memo Press the v key while the printer is offline to deliver paper the A key to rewind the paper 2 23 Chapter 2 2 3 3 2 Paper Path 2 3 3 2 1 Structure of Feed Roller Unit a Paper feed assembly The paper feed assembly consists of paper feeding mechanisms such as a feed roller that is driven by the feed motor and a pinch roller unit that follows up the motion of the feed roller Paper feeds horizontally under the printheads on the carriage as it is kept level on the platen to prevent cockle b Sensors The paper feed assembly includes sensors for detecting the status of paper feeding and that of the mechanical components that make up the paper passage For more details see TECHNICAL REFERENCE gt Detection Functions with Sensors c Roll media pick up drive unit When the roll media feeds the roll media pick up pressure clutch 1 turns on to actuate the torque limiter in the pick up drive unit Thus the back tension works to prevent the roll media from sags or skew At this time if the paper tube of roll media is inside diameter of 3 inches the pick up pressure solenoid and roll media pick up pressure clutch 2 turn on to increase the back tension about 2 6 times higher than before Media sensor Pinch roller
249. siest one After performing each step check to see if the problem has been resolved by making test prints If the problem persists proceed to the next step 5 After completion of the troubleshooting check that all connectors and cables have been reconnected and screws have been tightened firmly 6 Whenever you have performed replacement or repair services make test prints to check whether the problem has been resolved 6 2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement 6 2 1 Main controller PCB 1 1 Ne O 1 In Tiet Al e a ei B1 rc E EDER 1 1 LI 31201 48301 03002 12502 J2702 2701 1 1 1 1 1 F 6 1 T 6 1 J1001 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 VBUS IN USB VBUS 5V 2 D IN OUT USB data 3 D IN OUT USB data 4 AGND USB GND 5 FGND GND Connector shell 6 FGND GND Connector shell T 6 2 J1102 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 GND GND 2 GND GND 3 GND GND 4 3 3V OUT Power supply 3
250. signal 10 F 34 GND GND 35 HI E DATA 9 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 9 E 36 GND GND 37 HI F DATA 10 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 10 F 38 GND GND 39 HI E DATA 8 OD B OUT Odd head R data signal 8 E 40 GND GND 41 H1 E HE 8_B OUT Head R heat enable signal 8 E 42 GND GND 43 H1 D DATA 7 OD_B OUT Odd head R data signal 7 D 44 GND GND 45 H DASH_LICC2_B OUT Head analogue switch A D trigger signal 46 GND GND 47 CR_COVER IN Carriage cover sensor output signal 48 ENCODER_A IN Carriage encoder output signal A 49 ENCODER_B IN Carriage encoder output signal B 50 GND GND T 6 26 J103 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 FFC_SLANT_DET_SNS 2 HV_ENB OUT HV enable signal 3 VHT_ENB OUT VHT enable signal 4 GND GND 5 H1 A DATA 0 OD_B OUT Odd head L data signal 0 A 6 GND GND 7 H1 A HE 0_B OUT Head L heat enable signal 0 A 8 GND GND 9 HI A DATA 0 EV B OUT Even head L data signal 0 A 0 GND GND 1 H1 A HE 1_B OUT Head L heat enable signal 1 A 2 GND GND 3 H1 A DATA 1 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 1 A 4 GND GND 3 HI B DATA 2 EV B OUT Even head L data signal 2 B 6 GND GND 7 H1 B DATA 3 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 3 B 8 GND GND 9 H1 C DATA 4 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 4 C 20 GND GND 21 H1 B HE 3_B OUT Head L heat enable signal 3 B 22 GND GND 23 H1 C DATA 5 EV_B OUT Even head L data signal 5 C 24 GND GND 25 H1_LT_B OUT Head L latch signal 26 GND GND
251. surement in Increase the adjustment value to increase the feed amount for paper that tends to expand and reduce it for paper that tends to shrink Adj Fine Feed Displayed when you have selected Feed Priority gt Adj Priority gt Automatic or Print Quality Fine tune the feed amount manually during printing Calibration Auto Adjust Choose Yes for automatic adjustment of the adjustment value after a test pattern for color calibration is printed The new color calibration adjustment value is applied in all print jobs Calibration Log Check the date when color calibration was executed as well as the type of paper used as shown on the Display Screen Use Adj Value Choose Disabled gt OK if you prefer not to apply the color calibration adjustment value in print jobs The printer driver settings will be used instead Choose Enabled gt OK to apply the color calibration adjustment value in print jobs However printer driver settings are given priority Return Defaults Clear the color calibration adjustment value and the execution log Maintenance Head Cleaning Specify Printhead cleaning options Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint oddly colored or contains foreign substances Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all or if printing is not improved by Head Cleaning A Nozzle Check Print a nozzle check pattern Replace P head Not displayed d
252. t Points to Note on Disassembly Reassembly gt Ink Tank Units and close the ink supply valve 4 29 Chapter 4 4 3 16 Draining the ink There are two ways to drain the ink passage of inks automatic and manual A Be sure to drain the ink from the ink passage to prevent ink leakage before disassembling any component of the ink passage or reshipping the printer 1 Automatic Ink Drain Execute Automatic Ink Drain by selecting Set Adj Menu gt Prep MovePrinter from the main menu A Execute Automatic Ink Drain once again if the printer shuts down due to a power failure or any other trouble before the operation completes 2 Manual Ink Drain Drain the ink passage of inks manually if any electrical component in the printer fails or firmware malfunctions or if the printer fails to be powered on 1 Remove right circle cover L right circle cover S right side covers left right the ink tank cover units See Disassembly Reassembly gt Points to Note on Disassembly Reassembly gt External Covers 2 Remove the ink tanks 3 Move the carriage to above the platen See Disassembly Reassembly gt Points to Note on Disassembly Reassembly gt Opening the caps and moving the wiper unit 4 Release the printhead fixer lever 5 Open the ink supply valves to allow the inks to flow into the subtanks 3 Draining the ink in subtanks 1 Remove ink discharge tube 1 behind each subtank and move the ink from the subt
253. t 2 inserted in part 3 of the right side cover and turn the cover rearward to install 3 1 F 4 11 c Left right side covers Removing the left right side covers 1 To remove left right side covers 1 remove left right circle cover L and left right circle cover S 2 Remove three screws 2 and two hooks 3 and remove the cover by their bottom side d Operation panel Removing the operation panel 4 7 Chapter 4 1 To remove the operation panel 1 remove hook 2 with a flathead screwdriver and remove two connectors 3 3 e Upper left cover upper right cover Removing the upper left cover upper right cover 1 To remove upper left upper right cover 1 remove left right circle cover L left right circle cover S and left right side covers 2 Insert a flathead screwdriver at the indicated position to remove hook 2 1 F 4 14 f Right front cover Removing the right front cover 1 To remove right front cover 1 remove right circle cover L right circle cover S right side covers upper right cover the operation panel Chapter 4 2 Remove two screws 2 F 4 15 g Rear cover right rear cover left Removing the rear cover right rear cover left 1 To remove rear cover right 1 remove four screws 2 2 To remove rear cover left 3 remove the rear cover right and two screws 4 F 4 16 h Lower rear cover right lef
254. t filter cover Removing the lower rear cover right left filter cover 1 To remove lower rear cover right 1 remove four screws 2 2 To remove lower rear cover left 3 remove two screws 4 3 To remove filter cover 5 remove screw 6 5 8 F 4 17 i Left right ink tank cover units Removing the left right ink tank cover units Chapter 4 1 To remove left right ink tank cover unit 1 remove three screws 2 open tank cover 3 and remove two hooks 4 3 Ink tank units Opening the ink tank units 1 To open the left right ink tank units remove left right circle cover L left right circle cover S left right side covers upper left right cover and left right ink tank cover unit 2 Remove two screws 1 3 Remove screw 2 from the support plate at inner side of the printer 4 Remove screw 4 from the support plate 3 at outer side of the printer loosen screw 5 and slide the support plate to open the ink tank unit E 4 2 A The ink tank units will lock themselves when they are opened to the maximum allowable angle Be sure to open the ink tank unit to their maximum allowable angle to prevent them from turning over k Upper rear cover Removing the upper rear cover 1 To remove the upper rear cover remove left right circle cover L left right circle cover S left right side cov
255. t Used 34 Not Used 35 Not Used 36 Not Used 37 Not Used 38 Not Used 39 Not Used 40 Not Used 41 Not Used 42 Not Used 43 Not Used 44 Not Used 45 Flexible cable connection detection 0 Connection 1 Disconnection 3501 13502 J3601 73602 46 Not Used 47 Not Used 48 Not Used Chapter 7 c ADJUST Performs adjustments and prints the adjustment and check patterns necessary for adjusting the printer parts 1 PRINT PATTERN T 7 13 Display Description NOZZLE 1 Prints the nozzle check pattern by single direction single pass without using the non discharging back up It is used to check for the non discharging nozzles Media size A4 Media type any OPTICAL AXIS Prints the pattern and adjusts the optical axis of the multi sensor For details refer to Disassembly Reassembly gt Adjustment and Setup Items gt Procedure after replacing the carriage unit or multi sensor Media type photo glossy paper LF TUNING Carry out automatic correction of eccentricity of the feed roller For more details refer to Disassembly Reassembly gt Adjustment and Setup Items gt Procedure after replacing the feed roller and reed roller encoder The media type is gloss photo paper LF TUNING 2 Carry out manual correction of eccentricity of the feed roller For more details refer to Disassembly Reassemb
256. t cover s2 Move the carriage to above the platen Purge unit c1 s3 F 4 4 4 3 Chapter 4 4 4 4 Ink Tank unit Disassembly Flow lt Legend gt c Connector h Hook s Screw Right circle cover L h1 Right circle cover S h1 Right side covers s3 h2 Left right tank cover units s3 Move the carriage to above the platen Automatic ink drain Left right tank cover units s3 Manual ink drain Drain the ink in subtanks Remove the left right ink tube joints Ink tank unit c5 s2 Chapter 4 4 3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly 4 3 1 Note on locations prohibited from disassembly A Assemblies that are prohibited from disassembly and their adjustment outside the factory cannot be conducted are indicated by red screws Don t never loosen or remove the red screw because normal operation and print can t be done if it is loosened or removed F 4 6 4 3 2 Moving the carriage manually When moving the carriage hold it by handle 1 shown below A Move the carriage as required during assembly and disassembly to prevent the carriage from contacting the parts to be removed You cannot move the carriage when capping has been performed Refer to DISASSEMBLY REASSEMBLY gt Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly gt Opening the caps and moving the wiper unit to remove the caps and then move the carriage 4 3 3
257. t number of consumable parts CNT For details refer to Maintenance and Inspection gt Consumable Parts Initialize the consumable part replacement frequency Clear COUNTER gt EXCHANGE gt xx x EXC and count up COUNTER gt CLEAR gt CLR EXC 7 25 Chapter 7 7 26 Display Description PARTS PARTS xx x xx x Unit number of consumable parts COUNTER For details refer to Maintenance and Inspection gt Consumable Parts Initialize the counter amount of the consumable parts Clear COUNTER gt PARTS CNT gt COUNTER xx x After replacing the consumable part be sure to execute this menu USER SETTING Initializes the user menu Same as executing the following mode in the user menu Set Adj Menu System Setup Reset PaprSetngs Set Adj Menu Interface Setup Return Defaults CA KEY See e maintenance image WARE Remote for detail ERDS DAT See e maintenance image WARE Remote for detail Chapter 7 7 1 4 e Maintenance imageWARE Remote 1 Overview The e Maintenance imageWARE Remote system allows a customer s device information and status to be monitored via the Internet on a server called the UGW Universal Gateway Server The following device information statuses can be monitored Service mode counters Parts counters Mode counters Firmware information Service call errors log Jam log Alarm log Ale
258. t such as HUB must be ON If power OFF is needed do not leave it OFF for a long time An error such as Device is busy try later could occur if the power supply of network equipment is made prolonged OFF T 7 43 No Condition detected Action message list The communication test has failed Check network conditions such as proxy server settings and so on Check the communication log from COM LOG gt Execute Remedy in the Error Check whether RGW ADDRESS or RGW PORT settings have changed 7 35 Chapter 7 6 Error message list Details of the errors and their remedies are as described below The meaning of server indicates the UGW in this section T 7 44 No Error Message Cause Remedy 1 SUSPEND E RDS has been booted up device reboot with E Perform the communication test COMTEST in service mode Communication test is not RDS SWITCH ON but the performed communication test had not yet been performed 2 Event Registration is Failed Event Registration is Failed Processing event Turn the device OFF ON If the error persists replace the processing within the device has failed device system software firmware Upgrade 3 URL Scheme error not https The header of the URL of the registered UGW is Check that the value of UGW ADR has been entered correctly not in https format A https input er
259. tage 4 VH4 IN Power supply 5 VH4 IN Power supply 6 VH4 IN Power supply 7 VH4 IN Power supply 8 VH2 IN Power supply 9 VH4 IN Power supply 0 GND GND 1 GND GND 2 GND GND 3 GND GND 4 GND GND 5 GND GND 6 GND GND 7 VH3 IN Power supply 8 VH3 IN Power supply 9 VH3 IN Power supply 20 VH3 IN Power supply 21 VH3 IN Power supply 22 VH3 IN Power supply 23 VH3_FB IN VH3 feed back voltage 24 GND GND 25 GND GND T 6 41 J202 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 HO E HE 8 IN Head R heat enable signal 8 E 2 GND GND 3 H0 E DATA 8 OD IN Odd head R data signal 8 E 4 GND GND 5 H0 E DATA 9 OD IN Odd head R data signal 9 E 6 GND GND 7 H0 F HE 10 IN Head R heat enable signal 10 F 8 VH2 GND 9 H0 F DATA 10 OD IN Odd head R data signal 10 F 10 GND GND 11 HO F DATA 11 OD IN Odd head R data signal 11 F 12 GND GND 13 H0 F HE 11 IN Head R heat enable signal 11 F 14 GND GND 15 H0 F DATA 11 EV IN Even head R data signal 11 F 6 23 Chapter 6 6 24 J202 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 16 GND GND 17 HO0 F DATA 10 EV IN Even head R data signal 10 F 18 GND GND 19 9 IN Head R heat enable signal 9 E 20 GND GND 21 HO E DATA 9 EV IN Even head
260. te static electricity causing an electrical charge to build up on your body Such a charge can damage electrical devices or change their electrical characteristics In particular never touch the printhead contacts 1 gt SS 2 Fixing the Carriage After completion of printing the carriage is mechanically locked by the lock arm in the purge unit at the same moment the printhead is capped Before transporting the printer secure the carriage at its home position using belt stoppers 1 so that the carriage does not become separated from the lock arm and damage or ink does not leak mE 1 44 Chapter 1 3 Contact of Linear Scale Carriage Shaft Please do not touch a linear scale and the carriage shaft when the inside of the top cover is opened and execute maintenance When touching a linear scale and the carriage shaft it might cause defective movement of the carriage and a defective print 1 Linear Scale 2 Carriage Shaft 4 Replacing the maintenance cartridge When the maintenance cartridge detects that tank is full the Repl Maint C error appears In this case the maintenance cartridge must be replaced The printer will not operate until the error is cancelled Be careful that the waste ink does not splash when you remove the used maintenance cartridge from the printer MEMO This printer has an EEPROM in the maintenance cartridge and the maintenance cartridge status is controlled by the main c
261. tection signal ENCODER_A when the order of heated nozzles is reversed depending on the sequence of transfer of even numbered nozzle data and odd numbered nozzle data 150dpi t Linear scale Ss ENCODER A ENCODER B e ms E 2400dpi Internal signal 11011110 AT A en re rm 2400dpi AA HO_A_DATA_0_EV x Data of block 0 d Data of block 2 gt Data of block 4 Data of block 22 gt TI HO A DATA 1 EV Data of block 0 Data of block 2 amp Data of block 4 Data of block 22 MA H0_A DATA 0_OD Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22 HO_A_DATA_1_OD x Data of block 0 d Data of block 2 Data of block 4 d Data of block 22 1253 HO LT FT HO_A_HE_1 Low active F 2 4 2 4 Chapter 2 2 2 Firmware 2 2 1 Operation Sequence at Power on The sequence of printer operations from power on to transition to online mode is flowcharted below The printer takes less than 1 minute to initialize itself Excluding the times spent supplying inks and cleaning the printhead after leaving the printer for extended periods of time Power Button ON y Device resource initializarion Engine status check y Printhead ink tank check y Media feed system initialization Recovery system initialization Car
262. ter 1 T 1 20 Setting Item Description Instructions System Setup Erase HDD High Speed Delete the file management information of the saved data in the HDD Data Secure High Overwrite the random data in the whole of the hard disk drive Spd Secure Overwrite 00 and FF and random data in the whole of the hard disk drive once at a time Execute the verify check whether the data has written correctly to the hard disk drive Output Method Print Select the output method of jobs sent from software other than the printer driver This can be Print Auto set from the printer if you are using a printer driver Del Select Print to print normally Select Print AutoDel to print and delete the data in hard disk Select Save Box XX to save to box without printing Save Box XX Print After Recv Setting of jobs sent from software other than the printer driver This can be set from the printer if you are using a printer driver Select On to print after saving Save Shared Box Select Off to print without saving to a common box Take up Reel Use Take up Reel Choose Enable to use the Media Take up Unit Auto Feed This command is available only if Take up Reel is set to Enable Choose Yes to advance roll paper automatically on the Rewind Spool up to the fastening position Skip Take Up Err Choose On to continue with printing even if an error occurs with the Me
263. the printer The server address settings are activated only after you restart the printer Make sure you always restart the printer after changing server address settings 1 How to enter Proxy server address M n 1 EB server Address a ul http _ gt AV Select Stop Delete Navi a gt A gt 1 OK Set F 7 23 1 Display to show enter mode a Small alphabet letter A Capital alphabet letter 1 Numerical character 2 URL entry field 128 one byte characters Following symbols exist in each enter mode When you press the 4 key characters on the right hand side will appear a Small alphabet letter mode Symbol abcdefghijklmnopgrstuvwxyz A Capital alphabet letter mode Symbol ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1 Numerical character mode Symbol 1234567890 Symbol appears in the following order F 7 24 Within the URL entry field you can use or Y key to select a character and the lt or key to move the cursor The Stop key has the Delete function when there is a character at the cursor position The character at the position of the cursor is deleted moving all following characters one position toward freed place Tf there is no character at the cursor position it has the Backspace function The character at the left of the cursor is deleted moving the cursor When you move the cursor to a position of a character and press the A or Y key you can insert characters The c
264. ting Protection Control When an abnormal temperature rise in the printhead is detected overheating protection control launches Overheating could occur in the printhaed after a spell of print operations without the nozzles being filled with inks Overheating protection control is implemented on the basis of the temperature detected by the head temperature sensor for each nozzle When an abnormal temper ature is detected in any nozzle train overheating protection control is exerted at one of two levels according to that temperature Protection level 1 Tf the head temperature sensor DI sensor detects a temperature higher than the protection temperature it halts the carriage temporarily at the scan end position in the direction of travel according to the carriage scan status Printing resumes when the printhead radiates naturally to cool down to below a predetermined temperature or when 30 seconds or longer have elapsed since the detection of the temperature higher than the protection temperature Protection level 2 Tf the head temperature sensor DI sensor detects a temperature higher than the abnormal temperature the printer shuts down the print operation immediately moving the carriage to the home position for capping with an error indication on the display 2 2 6 Pause between Pages An inter page function is available to prevent ink rubbing which keeps paper just printed hanging above the platen and waiting for a predetermined period
265. tive pressure of the nozzle assembly caused by discharging inks Further waste inks sucked in a cleaning operation and inks from the maintenance jet tray flow into the maintenance cartridge A Opening all the ink passages by opening both the ink supply valve and the printhead fixer lever with an ink tank yet to be installed while an ink tube is filled with an ink could cause the ink in the ink tube to flow backward due to a head difference leaking through the hollow needle in the ink tank As a precaution never open all the ink passages at the same time while the ink tubes are filled with inks d Ink agitating Ink will be agitated to prevent the element of the pigment ink from subsiding in the ink tank and the sub tank The drive of valve motor is transmitted to the agitation cam the agitation fin in a sub tank rotates and ink in a sub tank will be agitated In addition ink flows backward by moving the piston under the needle ink supply up and down in the ink tank and ink in the ink tank will be agitated Chapter 2 2 3 2 2 Ink Tank Unit 2 3 2 2 1 Structure of Ink Tank Unit a Ink tanks The ink level in each ink tank is memorized in EEPROM attached to the tank and is detected as a dot count on the basis of the EEPROM information When an electrode attached to a hollow needle detects no continuity it displays a message reporting that the ink tank is nearly empty Tf the dot count reaches a predesigned value in this state an
266. to 44 inches on a 2 or 3 inch paper tube in roll form after they are printed by the host computer Taking up begins automatically when a sensor attached to the bottom of the stand detects a roll delivered after printing falling down due to the weight of a weight roller Rolls may also be manually taken up by using a button on the media take up unit The media take up unit has an overload protection feature to prevent accidents while taking up rolls The feature will shut down the motor automatically when an overload occurs while taking up a roll Additional features of the media take up unit include An adapter may be installed to support a 3 inch paper tube Rolls can be rewound by feeding them backward to visually check images Weight rollers varying in length to suit specific roll widths ensure added takeup efficiency The printer detects errors in the media take up unit by itself Linked with the printer s sleep mode F 1 11 T 1 3 1 Left media take up unit 4 Media take up unit 2 Rewind spool 5 3 inch adapter 3 Media take up sensor Weight This weight consists of weight roll 7 pcs 1 weight flange 2 sets 2 and weight joint 3 2 74 D a 3 F 1 12 Chapter 1 1 2 8 Hard disk drive Each print job received from the host computer is saved to the 80GB hard disk drive serial ATA connection attached to the printer so the printer can print the job repeatedly as needed without having to wait fo
267. to a significant degree High speed printing with a 1 inch head for each color 1 280 nozzles under bidirectional print control Ink supply through tubing to a completely independent printhead and large capacity ink tanks The color calibration feature adds to the faithfulness of color reproduction Hard disk drive mounted for greater ease of job management Functional enhancements new to this model include A newly developed 12 color pigment ink system LUCIA EX is used to improve rubfastness chromogenic effect and bronzing resistance ensuring higher grade printing A new mode has been added to improve control of the optimum ink droplet landing order when in the mode for the highest image quality and the ink droplet landing accuracy ensuring higher grade printing The network interface 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T compatible with 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet comes standard with the printer to cope with the high speed LAN environment 1 2 2 Printhead The printhead that mounts on the carriage is an integrated six color disposable printhead It has 2 560 nozzles for each color comprising two trays of 1 280 nozzles each arranged in a zigzag pattern Tf print quality remains unimproved even after a specified cleaning operation replace the printhead Replacement about one year after the date of initial unpacking is also recommended 1 2 3 Ink tank Ink tanks are disposable The ink tanks come with 12 colors mat
268. tput signal 10 B16 OUT_INK_DETECT11 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 11 B17 n c n c T 6 18 J3301 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 MENT_SDA IN OUT Maintenance cartridge ROM control signal data 2 MENT_SCL IN OUT Maintenance cartridge ROM control signal clock 3 GND GND 4 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 5 GND GND 6 FUTO_CLMP OUT Head management sensor clamp signal 7 FUTO_ON OUT Head management sensor ON signal 8 SNSSV OUT Power supply t5V 9 FUTO_CMP IN Head management sensor ink detection signal T 6 19 J3401 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 VMGND GND 2 VMGND GND 3 VMGND GND 4 VH MONII IN VH controll signal 1 5 VH MONI3 IN VH controll signal 3 6 VMGND GND vi VM 26V OUT Power supply 26V 8 GND GND 9 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 0 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V 1 GND GND 2 SNS5V OUT Power supply 5V 3 SNS5V OUT Power supply 5V 4 VM OUT Power supply 32V 5 VM OUT Power supply 32V 6 VM OUT Power supply 32V 7 VM OUT Power supply 32V 8 VM OUT Power supply 32V 9 VM OUT Power supply 32V 20 VM OUT Power supply 32V 21 VM OUT Power supply 32V 22 VMGND GND 23 VMGND GND 24 VMGND GND 25 VMGND GND T 6 20 J3501 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 GND GND 2 H1 C DATA 4 OD_OUT OUT Odd head L data signal 4 C 3 GND GND 4 H1 A DATA 1 OD_OUT OUT Odd head L data signal 1 A 5 GND GND 6 H1 B HE 2_B OUT Head L heat enable signal 2 B 7 GND GND 8 H0 D DATA 7 OD B O
269. ts approximately 110 kg When moving the printer have at least six people hold it from both sides taking care not to hurt their back F 3 3 F 3 4 When tilting the printer place a cardboard or blanket on the floor to prevent damage to the printer Chapter 3 When tilting the printer support the printer at bottom left and right side of the printer Tf the printer is supported at any other location the printer may be damaged or deformed 3 3 Chapter 3 a LEVEL 0 Moving the printer on the same floor without difference in grade T 3 1 Ttem Description Prep MovePrinter on the Main menu This need not be performed Allowed tilting angle Do not tilt Ink consumption No ink is consumed Ink tank It may be installed or removed Separation of main unit and stand They do not need to be separated Maintenance cartridge Install There is no need to open a new maintenance cartridge Replacement of consumable parts There is no need to replace consumable parts Service support No service support is necessary Transportation procedure 1 Turn off the power and check that the heads are capped 2 Open the upper cover and mount the belt stopper F 3 7 A When mounting the belt stopper be careful not to move the carriage by applying too much pressure If the c
270. ttern and enter values for adjustment 4 5 4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor Since the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit varies among printers the optical axis is factory adjusted to adjust the non discharging detection position When you have replaced the head management sensor or performed assembly reassembly of surrounding parts that can change the distance be tween the head management sensor and the carriage unit readjustment is required Perform the readjustment in the service mode Service mode SERVICE MODE gt ADJUST gt NOZZLE CHK POS 4 34 Chapter 4 4 35 Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE Contents Contents zl Periodic Replacement Parts tec e ait etl umore oltre etes 5 1 5 1 1 Periodic Replacement Parts ease 5 1 5 2 Consumable Parts 5 2 1 Consumable Parts 5 3 Periodic Maintenance 5 3 1 Periodic Maintenance 5 2 Chapter 5 5 1 Periodic Replacement Parts 5 1 1 Periodic Replacement Parts T 5 1 Level Periodic Replacement part User None Service None Personnel 5 2 Consumable Parts 5 2 1 Consumable Parts T 5 2 Consumables Service Mode Name Part number Q ty Tm PARTS xx States Error Code Service WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT QL2 2110 000 1 20000 Wia 1 OK W1 E146 4001 WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT L QL2 2108 000 2 20000 Wia 3 Wia 4 WASTE INK ABSORBER
271. ufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810212 2594 Low on the PM ink tank during pre printing checks Replace with a fully replenished PM ink tank Ink insufficient 03810213 2595 Low on the PC ink tank during pre printing checks Replace with a fully replenished PC ink tank Press OK and replace ink tank Ink insufficient 03810205 2598 Low on the GY ink tank during pre printing checks Replace with a fully replenished GY ink tank Press OK and replace ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810215 2599 Low on the PGY ink tank during pre printing checks Replace with a fully re plenished PGY ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810207 259A Low on the R ink tank during pre printing checks Replace with a fully re plenished R ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810209 259B Low on the B ink tank during pre printing checks Replace with a fully re plenished B ink tank Ink insufficient Press OK and replace ink tank 03810208 259C Low on the G ink tank during pre printing checks Replace with a fully re plenished G ink tank Ink tank error Press OK and replace ink tank 03830204 2540 BK ink tank ID error Replace with a valid BK ink tank Ink tank error Press OK and replace ink tank 03830201 254 Y ink tank ID error Replace with a valid Y
272. ule is not exist Server schedule does not exist Check the device settings status with the UGW administrator Blank schedule data has been received from UGW 20 Network is not ready try later Network related settings have not been made for Make network related settings properly for the device the device printer 21 URL error A URL setting error Check that the value of UGW ADR is https a01 Non URL text string entered in URL field 22 Proxy address resolution error A proxy server address resolution error Check that the proxy server name is correct 23 Server certificate verify error The server certificate verification URL check Check that the value of UGW ADR is https a01 error 24 Server address resolution error UGW address resolution has failed Check that the value of UGW ADR is https a01 1 Hexadecimal indicates an error code returned from the UGW in hexadecimal 7 Service cautions After performing the following service actions it is necessary to perform the resetting of the e RDS Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become unusual System software firmware upgrade After replacing the main controller board the following settings in service mode must not be changed unless there are specific instructions to do so Changing these values will cause error in communication with the UGW Initial values UGW PORT 443 UGW ADDRESS https a01
273. uring a warning message that the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low When replacing the Printhead choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen Repl maint cart When exchanging the maintenance cartridge choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen Repl S Cleaner When replacing the Shaft Cleaner choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen Change Cutter When transferring the printer to another location choose the level of transfer and follow the instructions on the screen 1 28 Chapter 1 T 1 18 Setting Item Description Instructions Interfac e Setup EOP Timer Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs that cannot be received by the printer TCP IP IPv4 Mode Choose whether the printer IP address is configured automatically or a static IP address is entered manually Protocol DHCP Specify the protocol used to configure the IP address automatically BOOTP RARP IPv4 Settings IP Address Specify the printer network information when using a static IP address Subnet Mask Enter the IP address assigned to the printer as well as the network subnet mask and default Default G W gateway DNS Settings DNS Dync Specify whether DNS server registration is updated automatically update Pri DNS Specify the DNS server address SrvAddr Sec DNS SrvAddr
274. urn on again 03130031 2F26 Carriage inoperable Check the carriage unit and surrounding parts Hardware error 03130031 2E27 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F27 Carriage move timeout Check the carriage unit and surrounding parts Chapter 8 Display massage Code Condition detected Action Hardware error 03130031 2E1F Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F1F Pump cam sensor error Check the purge unit Hardware error 03130031 2E2A Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F2A Unable to detect the feed roller home position Check the feed roller encoder and surrounding part Check to see if paper has not jammed Hardware error 03130031 2E29 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03010000 2F29 Feed motor timeout Roll media Check the roll feed unit Check roll media Check to see if paper has not jammed in the printer Hardware error 03130031 2E2E Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F2E Roll travel timeout Check the roll feed unit Hardware error 03130031 4027 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 4027 Lift travel timeout error Check the carriage unit and surrounding parts Hardware error 03130031 2E13 Turn off printer wait then turn on again 03130031 2F13 A D converter external trigger output stop d
275. ut signal N C N C 6 3 Chapter 6 T 6 7 J2501 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function Al N C N C A2 N C N C A3 N C N C A4 SNS3V OUT Power supply 3 3V AS GND GND A6 CR_HP IN Lift cam sensor output signal A7 OUT_LIFTM_VM OUT Power supply A8 OUT_LIFTMO_A OUT Lift motor drive signal A A9 OUT_LIFTM2_AX_NO OUT Lift motor drive signal AX 10 OUT_LIFTMI_B OUT Lift motor drive signal B All OUT LIFTM3 BX NI OUT Lift motor drive signal BX A12 ATUKAIJO IN IN Pressure release switch output signal A13 GND GND Bl PUMPMI_AM OUT Purge motor drive signal AM B2 PUMPMI_AP OUT Purge motor drive signal AP B3 GND GND B4 PUMPR_ENCA IN Pump encoder sensor output signal A B5 SNSSV OUT Power supply 5V B6 PUMPR ENCB IN Pump encoder sensor output signal B B7 SNS3V OUT Power supply 3 3V B8 GND GND B9 CONTROL CAM R IN Pump cam sensor output signal B10 GND GND B11 MEDIA_R IN Media sensor output signal B12 5 55 OUT Power supply 5V B13 N C N C T 6 8 J2502 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function 1 INKBENM1_AM OUT Right valve motor drive signal AM 2 INKBENMI_AP OUT Right valve motor drive signal AP 3 SNS3V OUT Power supply 3V 4 GND GND 5 INKBEN OPEN R IN Right valve open close detection s
276. ut signal O A9 OUT_INK_DETECT1 IN Ink detection sensor output signal A10 OUT_INK_DETECT2 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 2 All OUT TANK DATS IN OUT Ink tank data signal 5 12 OUT_TANK_DAT4 IN OUT Ink tank data signal 4 A13 OUT_TANK_DAT3 IN OUT Ink tank data signal 3 14 OUT_INK_DETECT3 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 3 15 OUT_INK_DETECT4 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 4 16 OUT INK DETECTS IN Ink detection sensor output signal 5 A17 GND GND Bl TANK_CLK OUT Ink tank clock signal B2 GND GND B3 OUT_TANK_DATS IN OUT Ink tank data signal 8 B4 TANK_ 3 3V OUT Power supply 3 3V B5 OUT_TANK_DAT7 IN OUT Ink tank data signal 7 B6 OUT_TANK_DAT6 IN OUT Ink tank data signal 6 B7 GND GND B8 OUT_INK_DETECT6 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 6 B9 OUT_INK_DETECT7 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 7 B10 OUT_INK_DETECTS IN Ink detection sensor output signal 8 Bll OUT TANK DATII IN OUT Ink tank data signal 11 B12 OUT_TANK_DATIO IN OUT Ink tank data signal 10 B13 OUT_TANK_DAT9 IN OUT Ink tank data signal 9 Chapter 6 J3201 Pin Number Signal name IN OUT Function B14 OUT_INK_DETECT9 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 9 B15 OUT_INK_DETECT10 IN Ink detection sensor ou
277. ve count of unit Wia 1 waste ink box unit replacement count Times clearing CLR Wia 3 EXC Cumulative count of unit Wia 3 platen ink box unit replacement count Times clearing CLR Wia 4 EXC Cumulative count of unit Wia 4 platen ink box unit replacement count Times clearing CLR Wia 5 EXC Cumulative count of unit Wia 5 platen ink box unit replacement count Times clearing CLR Wia 6 EXC Cumulative count of unit Wia 6 suction fan unit replacement count clearing Times CLR CR 1 EXC Cumulative count of unit CR 1 carriage unit bushing replacement count Times clearing CLR CR 2 EXC Cumulative count of unit CR 2 linear encoder sensor linear scale shaft Times cleaner replacement count clearing CLR CR 3 EXC Cumulative count of unit CR 3 carriage height changing cam replacement Times count clearing CLR CR 4 EXC Cumulative count of unit CR 4 ink tube unit flexible cable unit replacement Times count clearing CLR CR 5 EXC Cumulative count of unit CR 5 multi sensor replacement count clearing Times CLR PG 1 EXC Cumulative count of unit PG 1 purge unit replacement count clearing Times CLR HMa 1 EXC Cumulative count of unit HMa 1 head management sensor replacement count Times clearing CLR PL 1 EXC Cumulative count of unit PL 1 carriage motor replacement count clearing Times CLR PS 1 EXC Cumulative count of unit PS 1 feed motor replacement count clearing Times CLR Mi 1 EXC Cumulative count of unit Mi 1 mist fan
278. ve print area of paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches data size m2 Sq f D SQ 24 36 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches data size m2 Sq f D SQ 17 24 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches data size m2 Sq f D SQ 17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches data size m2 Sq f D CNT 44 60 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches sheets data size D CNT 36 44 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 inches sheets data size D CNT 24 36 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 inches sheets data size D CNT 17 24 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 inches sheets data size D CNT 17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4 equivalent paper less than 17 inches data size sheets 16 HEAD DOT CNT 1 Counter related to dot count 7 22 T 7 34 Display Description Unit XX XX Ink color x 1 000 000 dots Dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead TTL Total dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead x 1 000 000 dots Chapter 7 17 HEAD DOT CNT 2 Counter related to dot
279. ver L h1 Left right circle cover S h1 Left right side covers s3 h2 Upper left upper right covers h1 Rear cover right s4 Carriage PCB cover s4 Move the carriage to above the platen Left right printheads Left right joint bases Ink tube cover s2 Ink tube joint Rear cover left s2 Left right tank cover units Head management sensor s3 51 Open left right ink tank units Pulley base s3 s4 Flexible cable c3 o Lift unit s5 Upper rear cover s5 i Manual ink drain Cutter unit Carriage unit Chapter 4 2 Ink Tube Unit Disassembly Flow lt Legend gt c Connector h Hook s Screw Automatic ink drain U Left right printhead Left right circle covers L h1 Left right circle covers S h1 Left right side covers s3 h2 Upper left upper right covers hi h1 Flexible cable c3 Rear cover right s4 51 Rear cover left 52 Pulley base s3 Left right joint bases Ink tube cover s2 Ink tube joint Carriage PCB cover s4 o Left right tank cover unit s3 Open left right ink tank units s4 Upper rear cover s5 Lift unit s5 Cutter unit Carriage unit Flexible cable c5 i Manual ink drain i Cable fixer base s3 Move the carriage to Ink tube unit above the platen F 4 3 3 Purge Unit Disassembly Flow lt Legend gt c Connector h Hook s Screw Upper right cover h1 Operation panel h1 c2 Right fron
280. ween the ink tube unit and ink tank unit 1 3 Remove four screws 2 and five connectors 3 and then remove the ink tank unit A After detaching the joint between the ink tube unit and the ink tube of the ink tank unit the joint might become easy to come off by the ink that has adhered to it In that case please wash the joint by alcohol and remove the adhering ink 4 22 Chapter 4 b Reinstalling ink tank units The left and right ink tank units are installed to different positions at waste ink tray 1 Install the right ink tank unit at screw position 2 Install the left ink tank unit at screw position 3 Installing position of each ink tank units are inner side of the printer F 4 43 4 23 Chapter 4 c Removing the valve motor unit 1 To remove the valve motor unit remove the ink tank cover unit 2 Remove three screws 1 two connectors 2 and bearing 3 and then remove valve motor unit 4 Chapter 4 4 3 11 Linear Encoder a Removing the linear encoder 1 Move the carriage to above the platen 2 Remove two screws 1 and upper rear stay 2 3 Remove two screws 1 and linear encoder 2 a UU IS NEN lt BR 4 25 Chapter 4 4 3 12 Head Management Sensor a Removing the head management sensor 1 To remove head management sensor 1 remove screw 2 and disconnect connector 3 2
281. wer supply 3 VH3 OUT Power supply 4 VHT34 OUT Power supply H0 F DATA 10 EV OUT Even head R data signal 10 F 6 IO ASIC SDA IN OUT Head ROM control signal data 7 IO ASIC SCL OUT Head ROM control signal clock 8 VH2 OUT Power supply 9 H0 C DIAI IN Head R DI sensor signal 1 C 0 H0 A HE 1 OUT Head R heat enable signal 1 A 1 VH3 OUT Power supply 2 VH3 OUT Power supply 3 VH3 OUT Power supply 4 VH4 OUT Power supply 5 VH4 OUT Power supply 6 9 OUT Odd head R data signal 9 E 7 11 OUT Head R heat enable signal 11 F 8 HO0 E DIA 1 IN Head R DI sensor signal 1 E 9 H0 D DIAI IN Head R DI sensor signal 1 D 20 H3V 0 OUT Power supply 21 H3V 0 OUT Power supply 22 H0 B DATA 3 EV OUT Even head R data signal 3 B 23 H0 A DATA 0 EV OUT Even head R data signal 0 A 24 H0 B HE 2 OUT Head R heat enable signal 2 B 25 VH3 OUT Power supply 26 VH3 OUT Power supply 27 H0 D DIA2 IN Head R DI sensor signal 2 D 28 8 OUT Head R heat enable signal 8 E 29 HO E DIA2 IN Head R DI sensor signal 2 E 30 H0 F DIA2 IN Head R DI sensor signal 2 E 31 9 OUT Head R heat enable signal 9 E 32 H0 D DATA 7 EV OUT Even head R data signal 7 D 33 H0 D HE 6 OUT Head R heat enable signal 6 D 34 H0 C DATA 5 OD OUT Odd head R data signal 5 C 35 H0 C DATA 4 EV OUT Even head R data signal 4 C 36 HO A DATA 1 EV OUT Even head R data signal 1 A 37 H0 A DIA2 IN Head R DI sensor signal 2 A 38
282. witch The microswitch based pressure release switch detects the status of the paper release lever When the paper release lever closes the switch is pressed to detect the closed state of the paper release lever 2 32 Chapter 2 2 5 2 Ink passage system III pg mu my DD mp D Agitation cam sensor Valve open closed detection sensor Pump cam sensor Pump encoder Head management sensor F 2 31 Pump cam sensor As the cam rotates it shields the sensor light of the photointerrupter based pump cam sensor or allows it to be transmitted The status of the purge unit such as capped suction and wiping is detected by the combination of the pump cam sensor detection and the control of pump motor rotation by the pump encoder sensor 4 8 Rotary flag Sensor Carriage lock Capping Air passage valve open Printing Suction Idle suction Suction during printing e m Wiping Carriage lock Carriage move Maintenance jet Air passage Idle suction F 2 32 2 33 Chapter 2 Pump encoder sensor The photointerrupter based sensor reads slits in the encoder film of the Purge motor and controls the amount of its rotaion accordingly Slits Sensor F 2 33 Valve open closed detection sensor The photointerrupter based valve open closed detection sensor detects the status of the valve The sensor detects that the ink sup
283. xx x sq f ROLL XXXXXXX X M2 XXXXXXX X sq f CUTSHEET xxxxxxx x m2 XXXXXXX X sq f CUTSHEET xxxxxxx x m2 Sq f MEDIA SIZE1 ROLL P SQ P CNT 36 44 M2 XXXXXXX X S f 24 36 XXXXXXX X M2 xxxxxxx x S f 17 24 XXXXXXX X M2 XXXXXXX X SA 0 17 XXXXXXX X M2 XXXXXXX X sq f MEDIA SIZE2 ROLL D SQ D CNT 36 44 M2 xxxxxxx x S f 24 36 XXXXXXX X M2 XXXXXXX X S f 17 24 XXXXXXX X m2 XXXXXXX X sq f 0 17 XXXXXXX X M2 XXXXXXX X sq f MEDIA SIZE1 CUT P SQ P CNT 36 44 M2 XXXXXXX X S f 24 36 XXXXXXX X M2 XXXXXXX X sq f 17 24 XXXXXXX X m2 XXXXXXX X sq f 0 17 XXXXXXX X M2 XXXXXXX X SQ MEDIA SIZE2 CUT D SQ D CNT 36 44 M2 Xxxxxxx x SQ f 0 24 36 M2 Xxxxxxx x SQ f 0 17 24 XXXXXXX X M2 XXXXXXX X sq f 0 0 17 XXXXXXX X M2 XXXXXXX X sq f 0 ooo ooo F 7 56 7 44 Chapter 7 4 5 Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxx PRINT INF Firm xx xx Boot xx xx MIT DBF x xx MIT DB x xx S N xxxxxxxx Date yyyy mm dd HEAD DOT CNT 1 2 BK XXXXXXXXX TTL XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX HEAD DOT CNT 2 MBK xxxxxxxxx 2 BK XXXXXXXXX TTL XxXXXXXXXXXXXXXX HEAD INF 1 1 YY MM DD YY MM DD YY MM DD YY MM DD 2 YY MM DD YY MM DD YY MM DD 3 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
284. ystem Linear encoder Carriage cover sensor Head relay PCB Multi sensor Linear scale F 2 36 Carriage cover sensor The photointerrupter based carriage cover sensor detects the opening and closing of the carriage sensor When the carriage cover is closed the sensor light is shielded by the sensor arm enabling the sensor to detect that the carriage cover is closed Carriage HP sensor The photointerrupter based carriage HP sensor detects the home position of the carriage Installed on the right side plate of the printer the sensor detects an edge of the carriage home position on the carriage unit under carriage unit under carriage move ment control The printer establishes the carriage home position from the position at which its edge is detected as a reference position Linear encoder sensor Mounted on the back of the carriage the linear encoder detects the position of the carriage from a slit in the linear scale during its movement Lift cam sensor A photointerrupter based sensor After the sensor light is shielded by the flag the lift motor is driven by a predetermined number of pulses to regulate the separation between the printheads and platen automatically Ambient temperature sensor The thermostat based ambient temperature sensor mounted on the head relay PCB detects the ambient temperature to which the carriage is exposed The resistance of the thermistor that varies as a function of t

ipf8300 Service Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents